2018 Nissan Versa Sedan | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Nissan Versa Sedan Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 702

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2018

VERSA SEDAN
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

FOREWORD
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.
A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have
any questions, they will be glad to assist
you with the extensive resources available
to them.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT
REMINDERS!

SAFETY

INFORMATION

Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for
conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the
rear seat.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage
or
performance
problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with
the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain
with this manual all revision updates sent
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in your
Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer

Affairs. For contact information, refer to the
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in
this Owner’s Manual.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING

You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
carefully.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For
more
information
go
to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer to
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
SiriusXM® services
require a subscription after trial
period and are
sold separately or
as a package. The
satellite service is
available only in
the 48 contiguous
USA and DC.
SiriusXM® satellite
service is also
available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.

© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

– Your name, address, and telephone
number

For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase

For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR

For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
3. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-10, 1-42)
4. Seats (P. 1-2)
5. Supplemental air bag modules
(P. 1-42)
6. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-42)
7. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)
8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system (P. 1-20)
9. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LIC3852

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Engine hood (P. 3-10)
Windshield (P. 8-16)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)
Power windows (if so equipped)
(P. 2-30)
Door locks (P. 3-3)
Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-6)
Keys (P. 3-2)
Mirrors (P. 3-17)
Tire pressure (P. 8-28)
Flat tire (P. 6-2)
Tire chains (P. 8-28)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-22)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-22)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2461

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Antenna (P. 4-48)
Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-22)
Trunk lid release (P. 3-11)
Rearview camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-13)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-13)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-3)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2462

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Interior light (P. 2-32)
Sun visors (P. 3-16)
Map light (if so equipped) (P. 2-32)
Rearview mirror (P. 3-17)
Glove box (P. 2-27)
Parking brake (P. 5-17)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2463

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

LII2542

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15.
16.
17.

Headlight/turn signal switch/fog
light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-22)
Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
Horn (P. 2-25)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-12)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)
Vents (P. 4-8)
Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-22)
Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-42)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Climate controls (P. 4-8)
Audio system (P. 4-16)
Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
Glove box (P. 2-27)
Power outlet (P. 2-26)
USB connection port and AUX IN
jack (P. 4-41)
Shift lever (P. 5-11)
Cup holders (P. 2-27)
Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

18.
19.
20.

21.
22.
23.

Cruise control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-18)
Tilt steering (P. 3-16)
Audio control switches (P. 4-47)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System switches (P. 4-49)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-26)
Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-13)
Hood release lever (P. 3-10)
Electronic outside rearview mirror
control switch (P. 3-18)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
HR16DE Engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Drive belt location (P. 8-14)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
Air cleaner (P. 8-15)
Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)
Fusible link (P. 8-18)
Battery (P. 8-11)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
Radiator cap (P. 8-4)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LDI3055

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

2-13

Brake warning
light

2-13

Warning
light

Name

Page

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator
light

2-18

Cruise main
switch indicator
light (if so
equipped)

2-18

Low fuel warning
light

2-15

Low tire pressure
warning light

2-15

Power steering
warning light

2-17

Seat belt warning
light and chime (if
so equipped)

2-17

Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-18

Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-18

Front passenger
air bag status
light

Charge warning
light

2-14

Door open warning light

2-14

Engine oil pressure warning light

2-14

High beam indicator light (blue)

2-19

High temperature
warning light (red)
(if so equipped)

2-15

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-19

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Overdrive OFF
indicator light (if
so equipped)

2-20

Side light and
headlight indicator light (green) (if
so equipped)

2-20

Slip indicator light

2-20

Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights

2-20

Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Folding rear seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Armrest (if so equipped for driver’s side
only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Seat belt warning light (if so equipped) . . . . . . .1-13
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-59
Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-60

SEATS

∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

ARS1152

WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. For additional information,
refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.

LRS2571

LRS2572

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the
seat in position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
with the parking brake fully applied.

LRS2573

LRS2833

Seat lifter (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)

FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so
equipped)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

1
䊊

A to fold each seatback
Pull the knob 䊊
down.

WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the fold-down position. Use of
these areas by passengers without
proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or
sudden stop.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around the cars to prevent them
from playing and becoming locked in
the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked,
with the rear seatback and trunk lid
securely latched when not in use, and
prevent children’s access to car keys.

LRS2454

ARMREST (if so equipped for
driver’s side only)
To use the armrest, pull it down to the resting position.
A
䊊
B
䊊

Stowed position
Resting position

Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions.
Adjustable
head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest
stalks
or
remove
the
head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch
to secure them to the seat frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:

LRS2000

The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position
equipped with a head restraint.

䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).

– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.
∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
and locked in place before riding in that
designated seating position.

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2300

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.

LRS2299

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest

LRS2302

REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:

2. Single notch

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.

3. Lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

4. Stalks

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

LRS2303

INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk
1 must be
with the notch (notches) 䊊
installed in the hole with the lock knob
2 .
䊊

WRS0134

ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly
adjust
the
head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2351

For non-adjustable
headrest

head

restraint/

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

LRS2305

LRS2306

Raise

Lower

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0134

WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.

SSS0016

WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.

SSS0014

WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and all
seat belts fastened, it may indicate a
malfunction in the system. Have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.

NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.
For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

LRS0786

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT (if so
equipped)
The front driver seat is equipped with a
seat belt warning light.
The front passenger seat may be equipped
with a seat belt warning light.
The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the
driver and passenger seat belt.

NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.

LRS2571

LRS2674

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.

Fastening the seat belts

∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move, and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.

LRS2675

3. Position the lap belt portion low and
B as shown.
snug on the hips 䊊
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
C .
the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental air bag warning light” in
this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service or to learn more about seat belt
operation.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
1 . The seat belt automation the buckle 䊊
cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0242

Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. To
1
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
2 , so the belt passes over
desired position 䊊
the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.

∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the
driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
∙ Rear-facing child restraints
∙ Forward-facing child restraints
∙ Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” in this section.

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.

SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they
reach the maximum height or weight limit
allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouching?
∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

CHILD RESTRAINTS
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
LRS2690

If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.

ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation
of child restraints could result in serious
injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front
seat. If you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child
restraint installation using the seat
belts” in this section.

WRS0256

– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed
using
the
damaged
anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts, or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child
restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints
include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH
anchors or the seat belt to install the
child restraint (not both at the same
time).

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.
∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the rear outboard
seating positions only. Do not attempt to
install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
WRS0756

LATCH system lower anchor locations

LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.

– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.

– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

WRS0700

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
WRS0760

Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the rear par1 .
cel shelf 䊊

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:

WARNING
LRS0674

Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.

LRS2397

Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0799

Forward-facing

webbing-mounted –
step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.

ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

WRS0800

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.

WRS0697

Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2627
1
䊊
2
䊊

Rear bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear bench outboard seating positions only).

Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information for head
restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
1 over
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
WRS0699

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for
head restraint/headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 2 through 8.

WRS0475

Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, refer to "Front passenger air
bag and status light" in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

LRS2627
1
䊊
2
䊊

Rear bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1 over the
1. Position the top tether strap 䊊
seatback.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS2479

Low back booster seat

High back booster seat

LRS0453

LRS0464

Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
If the seatback is lower than the center
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat should be used.

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the
booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat or in the front passenger
seat:

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child
restraint.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699

1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.

LRS0454

Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.

WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light
may or
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
∙ Front
seat-mounted
supplemental air bag

side-impact

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag system

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in the outboard seating positions in certain sideimpact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for
a short time.
These supplemental restraint systems are
designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute
for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a
suitable distance away from the steering
wheel, instrument panel and door finishers.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.

This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
WRS0031

WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents
∙ The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in
a crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the front air bag
if you are up against it when it inflates.
Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag OFF under
some conditions. This sensor is only
used in this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

ARS1133

ARS1041

WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1042

ARS1043

ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

ARS1045

ARS1046

SSS0101

∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:

WARNING

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.

WARNING

SSS0162

SSS0159

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front seat
or near the side roof rails. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WRS0032

WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions
are
shown
in
the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.

LRS3007

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
2. Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
seats) (if so equipped)
3. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
4. Crash zone sensor
5. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor – located in front passenger
cushion frame)
8. Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
9. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
10. Side satellite sensor

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in
the rear seat or an object stored on
the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
the center console or between the
seat cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts the
instrument panel. If the child restraint
does contact the instrument panel,
the system may determine the seat is
occupied and the passenger air bag
may deploy in a collision. Also the
front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as
described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your front passenger seat
occupant classification system is
working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

∙ Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status
light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may
flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual
still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensors and occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classification sensors are also monitored. Based
on information from the sensors, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the
front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may
be automatically turned OFF under some
conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and
how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front passenger
air bag status light will be illuminated (if the
seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). For
additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.

front occupants. Because of this, the force
of the front air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, the front air bag module
during inflation.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.

The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver
and front passenger seated upright as far
as practical away from the steering wheel
or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.

WRS0475

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.

Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
bag status light
which is located on
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:
light is OFF and the front pasThe
senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate
in a crash.
∙ Front passenger seat occupied by a
small adult, child or child restraint as
light
outlined in this section: The
illuminates to indicate that the front
passenger air bag is OFF and will not
inflate in a crash.

∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the
passenger meets the conditions as
outlined in this section: The
light is
OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational.
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.
For additional information related to the
normal operation and troubleshooting of
this occupant classification sensor system,
please refer to “Normal operation” and
“Troubleshooting” in this section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

ing the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,
by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger
air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the
ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF
with the seat occupied. The light will not
illuminate when the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
that the child restraint is installed properly,
the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag
status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, the
system may be sensing an unoccupied
seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). A
NISSAN dealer can check that the system is
OFF by using a special tool. However, until
you have confirmed with a dealer that your
air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the
front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the
front passenger air bag status light will go
from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then
to OFF. This is normal system operation
and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air
, located in the mebag warning light
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.

Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status
light.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.

∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.

However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:

∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.

Troubleshooting

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:

NOTE:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger
and no objects on the front passenger
seat:
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.

A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.

NOTE:

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.

A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.

If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
child or child restraint occupying the
front passenger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.

This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

sion are similar to those of a higher severity
side impact. They are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.

LRS0259

Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental
air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof
rails. All of the information, cautions, and
warnings in this manual apply and must
be followed. The side air bags and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of colli-

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is
not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest of the front occupants. Curtain
air bags help to cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in the front and rear
outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-

ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air
bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side
air bag. Rear seat passengers should be
seated as far away as practical from the
door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags
and curtain air bags inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bags will remain inflated for
a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON or START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental inflation of the side air
bag and curtain air bag systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
curtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
∙ Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized
electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the
side air bag or curtain air bag
systems.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may
result in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work around and on
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the pretensioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased with the
seat belt retractor. These seat belts are
used the same way as conventional seat
belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
light
is used to indicate malfunctions
in the pretensioner(s) system. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental
air bag warning light” in this section. If the
operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

WRS0897

SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off. This means the system is
operational.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner
systems may not operate properly. They
must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to
inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These
systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The
ignition switch should always be placed in
the LOCK position when working under the
hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
the activated pretensioner(s) must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to verify it is still
functioning correctly. The OCS should
be checked even if no air bags deploy
as a result of the impact. Failure to
verify proper OCS function may result
in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

MEMO

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-26
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Seatback pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Manual windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Map light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

LII2542

2-2 Instruments and controls

15.
16.
17.

METERS AND GAUGES
18.
19.
20.

21.
22.
23.

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LIC3131

Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Trip computer

5.
6.
7.

Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator
Instrument brightness control
knob
Change/reset button
Instruments and controls 2-3

CAUTION
∙ To clean the meter lens, use a soft
cloth, dampened with water. Never
use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,
thinner or any kind of solvent or paper
towel with a chemical cleaning agent.
They will scratch or cause discoloration to the lens.
∙ Do not spray any liquid such as water
on the meter lens. Spraying liquid
may
cause
the
systems
to
malfunction.

LIC2146

Type B (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.

2-4 Instruments and controls

Tachometer
Temperature gauge
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Trip computer

4.
5.
6.

Outside air temperature (if so
equipped)
Fuel gauge
Speedometer
Change/reset button

7.
8.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator
Instrument brightness control
CAUTION

∙ To clean the meter lens, use a soft
cloth, dampened with water. Never
use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,
thinner or any kind of solvent or paper
towel with a chemical cleaning agent.
They will scratch or cause discoloration to the lens.
∙ Do not spray any liquid such as water
on the meter lens. Spraying liquid
may
cause
the
systems
to
malfunction.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

LIC2118

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2136

Type B (if so equipped)

Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side or in the center of
the meter cluster. The odometer is located
within the trip computer.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Average fuel economy and distance to
empty information is also available. For additional information, refer to “Trip computer” in this section.

LIC3305

Type A (if so equipped)

Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
1 records the total disThe odometer 䊊
tance the vehicle has been driven.
2 records the disThe twin trip odometer 䊊
tance of individual trips.

2-6 Instruments and controls

LIC2139

Type B (if so equipped)
Changing the display
Press the change/reset button
change the display as follows:

3
䊊

Odometer (ODO) → Trip
→ Trip
→ Instant fuel consumption → Average fuel
consumption → DTE (cruising range) →
Odometer (ODO)
Resetting the trip odometer
3 for more
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

LIC3306

Type A (if so equipped)

Loose fuel cap warning message
A for more than
Push the reset button 䊊
1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message after the fuel cap has
been tightened. For additional information,
refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.

LPD2025

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3307

Type A (if so equipped)

Check tire pressure warning
message (if so equipped)
The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is
displayed when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure
is detected. Check and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The CHECK TIRE PRES
warning message can be turned off using
A on the meter, the low
the reset button 䊊
tire pressure warning light will not be
turned off.

Instruments and controls 2-7

LPD2128

Type B (if so equipped)
The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in this section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section,
and “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

2-8 Instruments and controls

LIC3598

Type A (if so equipped)

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
1 .
Do not rev the engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.

LIC2151

Type B (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature. The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION
LIC2501

Type B (if so equipped)

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE (if so equipped)
Type A (if so equipped)
Engine coolant temperature monitoring is
performed by the high temperature warning light. For additional information, refer to
“High temperature warning light” in this
section.

If the gauge indicates a coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the temperature. If the gauge is
over the normal range, stop the vehicle
as soon as safely possible. If the engine
is overheated, continued operation of
the vehicle may seriously damage the
engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual for immediate action required.

LIC2286

Type A (if so equipped)

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
Type A (if so equipped): The fuel level segA will blink when the amount of fuel
ments 䊊
in the tank is getting low.

Instruments and controls 2-9

CAUTION
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
check engine light may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few
driving trips, the
light should
turn off. If the light remains on after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
LIC2287

Type B (if so equipped)
Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warnA will turn on when the amount of
ing light 䊊
fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
indicates that the fuel-filler
The
door is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.

LIC2470

Type A (if so equipped)

TRIP COMPUTER
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can
be selected by pushing the change/reset
A on the instrument panel located
button 䊊
near the speedometer. The following
B:
modes can be selected in the display 䊊
∙ Odometer
∙ Trip A
∙ Trip B
∙ Instant fuel consumption
∙ Average fuel consumption

2-10 Instruments and controls

Instant fuel consumption
The instant fuel consumption mode shows
the instant fuel economy. The display updates instantly when driving.

Average fuel consumption (mpg
or l (liter)/100 km)

LIC2138

Type B (if so equipped)
∙ Distance to empty
∙ Outside air temperature (if so equipped)

Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.

Trip A
Measures the distance of one specific trip.

Trip B
Measures the distance of a second specific
trip.

The average fuel consumption mode
shows the average fuel consumption since
the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing
the trip or change button for more than
approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first
1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display
shows (----).

Distance to empty
The distance to empty mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can
be driven before refueling. The range is
constantly being calculated, based on the
amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the
actual fuel consumption.

wish to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the
distance to empty will display (----).

Outside air temperature (°F or °C)
(if so equipped)
The outside air temperature is displayed in
°F or °C.
The ambient temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor
may be affected by road or engine heat,
wind directions and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual ambient temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or
billboards.

Trip computer reset
Pressing the change/reset button for
more than 3 seconds will reset all modes
except Trip A and distance to empty.

Instruments and controls 2-11

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light

Power steering warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Brake warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime (if so
equipped)

Overdrive OFF indicator light
(if so equipped)

Charge warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Side light and headlight indicator light
(green) (if so equipped)

Door open warning light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light

Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Cruise main switch indicator light
(if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

High temperature warning light (red)
(if so equipped)

Front fog light indicator light
(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

Front passenger air bag status light

Low fuel warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

2-12 Instruments and controls

High beam indicator light (blue)

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
or
,
,
,
,
The following lights (if so equipped) will
come on briefly and then go off:
or

(red) ,

,
,
,
If any light does not come on or operate in
a way other than described, it may indicate
a burned out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTS
This vehicle has various warning lights that
may illuminate to indicate a potential problem. For additional information, refer to the
specific light in this section.

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information,
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on when the
parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running, with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Brake warning
light

This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.

Instruments and controls 2-13

WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for repairs.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
because
driving
it
could
be
dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.

2-14 Instruments and controls

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed
driving and abrupt braking. For additional
information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the generator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the
light remains on, have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage
control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For
additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
∙ Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors
are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure
warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,
stop the engine immediately and call a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair
shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For
additional information, refer to “Engine oil”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as
it is safe to do so.

High temperature warning
light (red) (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the high temperature warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates that the high temperature sensor
in the engine coolant system is operational.
When driving, the high temperature warning light may turn off. This indicates that the
engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range.

CAUTION
If the high temperature warning light
illuminates while the engine is running,
it may indicate the engine temperature
is extremely high. Stop the vehicle
safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle
is overheated, continuing vehicle operation may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer
to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.

Low fuel warning
light

This light comes on when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty), showing no more fuel bars.

Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning

A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is also displayed in the odometer.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For additional information, refer to "Check
tire pressure warning message" in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section
and in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not
appear if the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.

2-16 Instruments and controls

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or
death. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.

Power steering warning
light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of the
vehicle, but the steering will be harder to
operate. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the power steering is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have
the power steering checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and
chime (if so equipped)
The light and chime remind you to fasten
your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position and remains illuminated
until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
same time, the chime sounds for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied . For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the
system does not activate the warning light
for the front passenger.

Instruments and controls 2-17

For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-

2-18 Instruments and controls

tion properly. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
This vehicle has various indicator lights
that may illuminate to indicate a system
status. For additional information, refer to
the specific light in this section.

refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch
indicator light (if so
equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The light goes out
when the main switch is pushed again.
When the cruise main switch indicator light
comes on, the cruise control system is operational. For additional information, refer
to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Front fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For
additional information, refer to “Fog light
switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes
on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
the trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap is
loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Overdrive OFF indicator
light (if so equipped)
The overdrive OFF indicator light illuminates when the overdrive OFF mode is selected.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Side light and headlight
indicator light (green) (if so
equipped)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlights are on (not including daytime running or signature lights). If the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position, the side light
and headlight indicator light will illuminate
when the headlights turn on. For additional
information, refer to “Headlight and turn
signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system is operating, thus alerting the driver to
the fact that the road surface is slippery
and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

2-20 Instruments and controls

You may feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after
the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
indicator light also comes on
The
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on
have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.

normally. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
The VDC indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after
about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on
along with the
indicator light while
you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is
opened while the key is left in the ignition
switch. Remove the key and take it with you
when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off or to
AUTO before leaving the vehicle.

LIC2789

Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set
and the vehicle is driven. The chime will
stop if the parking brake is released or the
vehicle speed returns to zero.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2131

Type B (if so equipped)
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

SWITCH OPERATION

3
䊊

The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

4 to have one sweep
Push the lever up 䊊
operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:

5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.

1
䊊

2
䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted (if so
equipped) by turning the knob toward
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster).
䊊
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

Instruments and controls 2-21

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.

CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the reservoir is empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

2-22 Instruments and controls

LIC2127

LIC2116

To defrost the rear window glass, start the
engine and push the rear window defroster
switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push
the switch again to turn the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.

Type A (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊

2
䊊

Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come
on.
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.

3
䊊

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams need not be engaged
for this function.

Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is in
the
or
position, the headlights
will turn off after a period of time.

CAUTION
WIC1509

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

LIC2128

Headlight beam select
1
䊊

2
䊊

To select the high beam function, ensure the low beams are engaged and
push the lever forward. The high beam
light illulights come on and the
minates. For additional information, refer to “Headlight control switch” in this
section.

Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.

Pull the lever back to return to the low
beams.

Instruments and controls 2-23

LIC2289

Type A (if so equipped)

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in
the
or
position.
A to adjust the
Type A: Press the control 䊊
brightness of instrument panel lights.
A to adjust the
Type B: Press the control 䊊
brightness of instrument panel lights.

Also, Type B is equipped with daytime
brightness control. Brightness can be adjusted with the headlight control switch in
A .
the OFF position by pressing the control 䊊

2-24 Instruments and controls

LIC2137

Type B (if so equipped)

WIC1512

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1
䊊

Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal
2
䊊

Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.

HORN
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.
Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, and release the lever.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.

WIC1513

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so
equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
position, then turn the
fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are selected.

LIC2419

To sound the horn, push the center pad
area of the steering wheel.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.

Instruments and controls 2-25

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH

POWER OUTLETS
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

LIC3609

LIC3344

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The
indicator will come
on.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel
The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. The outlets are rated at 12 volt,
120W (10A) maximum.

CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.

STORAGE

∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.

LIC3610

Console (if so equipped)
∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.

LIC2157

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.

Instruments and controls 2-27

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.

LIC1328

SEATBACK POCKET (if so
equipped)
The seatback pocket is located on the
back of the passenger’s seat. The pocket
can be used to store maps.

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items:

2-28 Instruments and controls

LIC3614

STORAGE TRAY
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.

LIC3611

LIC3613

Front

GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
A to store and
Use pocket on glove box lid 䊊
hide small objects.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

LIC3612

Rear

CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is
hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

Instruments and controls 2-29

WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.

LIC2158

Bottle holder

CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

2-30 Instruments and controls

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or passenger’s door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.

WIC1100

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Window lock button
Power door lock switch
Front passenger’s side window
switch
Right rear passenger’s window
switch
Left rear passenger’s window
switch
Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window
switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close the front
and rear passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and
hold it down. To close a window, pull the
switch and hold it up. To stop the opening
or closing function at any time, simply release the switch.

Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.

LIC0718

Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open the window, push the switch
1 . To close the window,
and hold it down 䊊
2 .
pull the switch up 䊊

LIC0718

Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
open the window, push the switch and hold
1 . To close the window, pull the
it down 䊊
2 .
switch up 䊊

Instruments and controls 2-31

INTERIOR LIGHTS

LIC0410

Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window
switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

LIC3352

MANUAL WINDOWS (if so
equipped)
The side windows can be opened or closed
by turning the hand crank on each door.

SIC2063A

The interior light has a three-position
switch and operates regardless of ignition
switch position.
1 ,
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of
door position. The lights will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
2 ,
When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊
the interior lights will stay on for a period of
time when:

2-32 Instruments and controls

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if
so equipped), a key or the power door
lock switch (if so equipped) while all
doors are closed and the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is
activated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob
(if so equipped), a key, or the power door
lock switch (if so equipped).
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
3 ,
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
the interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door position.

The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

LIC2126

MAP LIGHT (if so equipped)
The map light has a three-position switch
and operates regardless of ignition switch
position.
3 ,
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
the map light illuminates, regardless of
door position. The light will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-33

TRUNK LIGHT
2 ,
When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊
the map light will stay on for a period of
time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if
so equipped), a key or the power door
lock switch while all doors are closed
and the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the timer is activated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob
(if so equipped), a key, or the power door
lock switch.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
1 ,
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
the map light does not illuminate, regardless of door position.

The light will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

2-34 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the
light goes off. For additional information,
refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-5
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-6
How to use remote keyless entry
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11

Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Opener operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,
it can be duplicated without knowing the
key number.
LPD2027

Type B—Remote keyless entry key fob (if
so equipped)

1.
2.

Integrated door lock key fob (2
sets)
Key number plate
CAUTION

SPA2342

Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.

Master key
Valet key
Key number plate

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.

DOORS
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,
it can be duplicated without knowing the
key number.

When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.

WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows and/or inadvertent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and/or pets.

∙ Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

LPD2160

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.

Manual (if so equipped)
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
1 . To unlock, turn the key
of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
toward the rear of the vehicle 䊊

SPA2760

LPD2161

Inside lock

Power (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front 䊊 of the
vehicle locks all doors.
1

Turning the key one time toward the rear
2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From
䊊
that position, returning the key to neutral
3 (where the key can only be removed and
䊊
inserted) and turning it toward the rear
again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
4 .
䊊

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
1 ,
inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊
then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
2 .
䊊

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s
or front passenger’s side) is moved to the
lock position with the key in the ignition
switch and any door opens, all doors will
lock and then unlock automatically. This
helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so
equipped)

WPD0381

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen1 . When
ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊
locking the door this way, be certain not to
leave the key inside the vehicle.

∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h
(15 mph).
∙ All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park) position (if so equipped), when the ignition
is turned to the OFF position, or when the
key is removed from the ignition.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas2 .
senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ The remote keyless entry key fob
transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do
not operate the remote keyless entry
key fob while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored
for a flight.

SPA2037

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
2 ,
When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊
the door can be opened from the outside
or the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.
1

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn
the interior lights on, and activate the panic
alarm by using the key fob from outside the
vehicle.

As many as four key fobs can be used with
one vehicle. For information concerning
the purchase and use of additional key
fobs, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
∙ The battery is discharged.
∙ The distance between the vehicle and
the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).
The panic alarm will not activate when
the key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the key fob:
∙ Do not allow the key fob, which contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
∙ Do not drop the key fob.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors.

∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.

The key fob can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
The effective distance depends on the
conditions around the vehicle.

∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If
the key fob gets wet, immediately
wipe until it is completely dry.

∙ When the
button is pressed
with all doors locked, the hazard
warning lights flash twice and the
horn beeps once as a reminder that
the doors are already locked.

∙ Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.

∙ If a door is open and you press
the
button, the doors will lock
but the horn will not beep and the
hazard lights will not flash.
The horn may or may not beep. For additional information, refer to “Silencing the
horn beep feature” in this section.

∙ Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that
key fob. This will prevent the key fob
from unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the
erasing procedure, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

LPD2028

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Close all doors.
button on the key fob.
4. Press the
All the doors lock. The hazard warning
lights flash twice and the horn beeps
once to indicate all doors are locked.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

button on the key fob again
Press the
within five seconds.
∙ All doors unlock.
∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if
all doors are completely closed.
The interior lights can be turned off without
waiting a period of time by inserting the key
into the ignition switch and placing the ignition switch in the ON or START position,
locking the doors with the key fob, power
door lock switch or pushing the interior
light switch to the off position.
LPD2029

Unlocking doors
Press the

button on the key fob once.

∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks.

Auto relock

LPD2030

When the
button on the key fob is
pressed, all doors will lock automatically
within 1 minute unless one of the following
operations is performed:

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if
all doors are completely closed with the
ignition switch in any position except
the ON position.
∙ The interior light turns on and the light
timer activates for 30 seconds when
the interior light switch is in the DOOR
position with the ignition switch in any
position except the ON position.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Any door is opened.
∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switch
and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
∙ Press the

button.

Releasing the trunk lid
Press the
button on the key fob for
longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk
lid. The trunk release button on the key fob
will not operate when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.

Using the interior light
Press the
button on the key fob once
to turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior
light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2031

LPD2032

Using the panic alarm

Silencing the horn beep feature

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
the
button on the key fob for longer
than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.

If desired, the horn beep feature can be
deactivated using the key fob.

The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time.
∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

HOOD
The hazard warning lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

1
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
located below the instrument panel
until the hood springs up slightly.
2 in between the
2. Locate the lever 䊊
hood and grille and push the lever sideways with your fingertips.
3 .
3. Raise the hood 䊊

4. Remove the support rod and insert it
4 .
into the slot 䊊

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2618

Hold the coated parts when removing or
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct
contact with the metal parts, as they
may be hot immediately after the engine
has been stopped.
When closing the hood, return the support
rod to its original position, lower the hood
to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the
latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

TRUNK LID

WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING
∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.

LPD2036

KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close the trunk lid, lower and push
the trunk lid down securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.
The trunk lid release is located on the floor
to the left of the driver’s seat.
To open the trunk lid, pull the opener lever
up.
LPD2215

OPENER OPERATION (if so
equipped)

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the
trunk lid down securely.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0396

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
The interior trunk lid release mechanism
provides a means of escape for children
and adults in the event they become
locked inside the trunk.
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the
illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The
release handle is made of a material that
glows in the dark after a brief exposure to
ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the trunk lock at the center of
the trunk lid.
LPD2371

OPENER OPERATION

LPD2616

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler door release is located below
the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler
door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuelfiller door securely.

WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could
also cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:

– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
Recommendation” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be
displayed. Failure to tighten the fuelfiller cap properly after the LOOSE
FUEL CAP warning appears may cause
the
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) to illuminate.

– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
The
light should turn off after a
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have your vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section in this manual.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
NOTE:
Changing ignition switch status during
the refueling process may cause a delay
in fuel gauge response.

3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset
A in the meter for about 1 secbutton 䊊
ond to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message after tightening the
fuel-filler cap.

LPD2617

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook
1 while refueling.
䊊
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until it
clicks.

LPD2343

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message
displays in the trip computer when the
fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may
take a few driving trips for the message to
be displayed. To turn off the warning message, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
previously described as soon as possible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

STEERING WHEEL

SUN VISORS
3 sun visor in or
3. Slide the extension 䊊
out as needed.

CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcibly downward.

LPD0355

TILT OPERATION
1 down and adjust the
Push the lock lever 䊊
2 to the desteering wheel up or down 䊊
sired position.
1 up to lock the steering
Pull the lock lever 䊊
wheel in place.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.

WPD0315

1. To block glare from the front, swing
1 .
down the sun visor 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the sun visor from the center mount
2 .
and swing the visor to the side 䊊

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MIRRORS
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to
other objects.

SPA1733

WPD0126

VANITY MIRROR

REARVIEW MIRROR

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

1 reduces glare from
The night position 䊊
the headlights of vehicles behind you at
night.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

2 when driving in
Use the day position 䊊
daylight hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

LPD0237

LPD2216

Electric control type

Manual folding outside mirrors

The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.

1 to select the right
Move the small switch 䊊
or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de2 .
sired position using the large switch 䊊
1 to the center
Move the small switch 䊊
(neutral) position to prevent accidentally
moving the mirror.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,
audio and phone systems
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Difference between predicted and
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-6
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-17
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type A) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type B) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
iPod®* player operation (if so equipped). . . . . . 4-43
Bluetooth® streaming audio
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Steering wheel switch for audio control. . . . . . 4-47
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Voice Adaptation (VA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69

Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)

LHA4456

WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and look out the
windows and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move before operating
the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. The radio can still be heard while
the RearView Monitor is active.

LHA3768

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located next to
1 .
the trunk handle 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA2944

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with referA are disence to the vehicle body line 䊊
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Yellow line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle
width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level,
paved surface. The distance viewed on the
monitor is for reference only and may be
different than the actual distance between
the vehicle and displayed objects.

LHA3769

LHA3770

Backing up on a steep uphill

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

A
object when backing up to the position 䊊
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA2946

LHA3619

Backing up near a projecting
object

Backing up behind a projecting
object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.

C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the
the position 䊊

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to
complete the adjustment.
∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING

LHA3639

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (reverse)
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. The screen will display the Brightness
settings.
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
the setting up or down.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button
again to display the Contrast settings.

Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show
every object.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
the setting up or down.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
1 , the RearView Monitor may not
camera 䊊
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.

LHA3768

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION

∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

VENTS

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.

SAA3126

Side vents
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by
opening, closing or rotating.

LHA2085

Center vents
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by
1 .
moving the slide as indicated 䊊

∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.

LHA3655

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Rear window defroster switch
Fan control dial
Air conditioner button
Temperature control dial
Air intake lever (Air recirculation
and Fresh air)
Air flow control dial

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The
fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select
the air flow outlets.

— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.

Fresh air
Move the air intake lever to the
position. The air flow is drawn from outside the
vehicle.

Air recirculation
Move the air intake lever to the
position to recirculate air inside the vehicle.
selection:
Use the
∙ when driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
air conditioner.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to
the desired position and press the
button to turn on the air conditioner. The
indicator light comes on when the air con-

ditioner is operating. To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position for normal heating.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
fan control dial to the
3. Turn the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
fan control dial to the
3. Turn the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Move the
position.

air intake lever to the

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
position.
the
fan control dial to the
3. Turn the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
windows, turn the
fan control dial
to the maximum position and the temperature control dial to the full hot position.

fan control dial to the
3. Turn the
desired position.

When the
or
position is selected, press the
button to turn on
the air conditioner for better performance.
This will dehumidify the air and help defog
the windows.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
LHA3765

NOTE:

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.

Side vents should direct air flow towards
the front side windows to improve defogging performance.

fan control dial to the
3. Turn the
desired position.

Bi-level heating
This mode directs cooler air from the side
and center vents and warmer air from the
floor outlets. When the temperature control dial is moved to the full hot or full cool
position, the air between the vents and the
floor outlets is the same temperature.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
or
position is seWhen the
lected, press the
button to turn on
the air conditioner for better performance.
This will dehumidify the air and help defog
the windows.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
button to activate the air condithe
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are
added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
fan control dial to the
3. Turn the
desired position.
button. The indicator
4. Press the
light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.

∙ For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, move the air intake
lever to the
position. Be sure to return to the
position for normal
cooling.

fan control dial to the
3. Turn the
desired position.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
position.
the
fan control dial to the
3. Turn the
desired position.
button. The indicator
4. Press the
light comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Operating tips
∙ Keep the windows closed while the air
conditioner is in operation.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or
3 minutes with the windows open to
vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows.
This allows the air conditioner to cool
the interior more quickly.
∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
This helps prevent damage to the
system due to lack of lubrication.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The air intake lever should always be in the
position for heating and defrosting.

LHA3656

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

LHA3657

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LHA3658

LHA3659

LHA4593

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.

RADIO

Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioning system.

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the ON•OFF or
(power) button to turn the radio on. If you
listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition switch should be placed in
the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced
technician
with
proper
equipment.

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are
designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect your
radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range
than stereo FM. External influences may
sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of
the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.

for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position (usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and
reflected signals reach the receiver at the
same time. The signals may cancel each
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss
of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
can bend around objects and skip along
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
to earth. Because of these characteristics,
AM signals are also subject to interference
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite
radio reception.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first
time or the battery has been replaced, the
satellite radio may not work properly. This
is not a malfunction. Wait more than
10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the
vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If
satellite radio is not operational then
pressing the FM•AM button will switch between FM and AM bands.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the satellite radio signal.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
∙ Do not force a compact disc into the
CD insert slot. This could damage the
CD and/or CD changer/player.
∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or
CD changer.
∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
∙ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
∙ During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
LHA0099

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

∙ The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
∙ The CD player sometimes cannot
function when the compartment
temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
∙ CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
∙ The following CDs may not work
properly:
∙ Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
∙ Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
∙ Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
∙ Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
∙ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
∙ CDs that are not round
∙ CDs with a paper label
∙ CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
∙ This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
∙ If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

∙ Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).

Terms

∙ Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT:
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove
the CD by pressing the EJECT button.
After a short time, reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA (if so
equipped) CD).

∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
of the size of normal audio files. MP3
conversion of an audio track from CDROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible
loss
in
quality.
MP3
compression removes the redundant
and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
that the human ear doesn’t hear.
∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is
a compressed audio format created by
Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the
same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.
∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
∙ The names of folders not containing
MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the
display.
∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
∙ The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play
in the desired order.

WHA1078

Playback order chart

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Specification chart
Supported media
Supported file systems

MP3
Supported
versions*1

WMA

Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate

Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2

CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

Troubleshooting guide
Symptom

Cannot play

Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long
time before the music
starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit
rate files
Moves immediately to
the next song when playing
Songs do not play back
in the desired order

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music
starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright
protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the
vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB
memory devices, USB hard drives and
iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
be supported by this system.
∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly.
∙ Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
not appear properly in the display. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
General notes for USB (if so equipped)
use:
∙ For additional information, refer to your
device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.

Notes for iPod® (if so equipped) use:
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it
is connected during a seek operation. In
this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.
∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod®.
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
may momentarily black out, but will
soon recover.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large
video files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

iPod®* player (if so equipped)
∙ Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not
displayed properly on the vehicle center
screen. We recommend using English
or Spanish language characters with an
iPod®.
∙ Large video podcast files cause slow
responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out,
but it will soon recover.

∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on the iPod®.
∙ The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may
remain in fast forward or rewind mode if
it is connected during a seek operation.
In this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.
∙ If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very
long names for the song title, album
name or artist name to prevent the
iPod® from resetting itself.

∙ If the iPod® automatically selects large
video podcast files while in the shuffle
mode, the vehicle center display may
momentarily black out, but it will soon
recover.

∙ Be careful not to do the following, or the
cable could be damaged and a loss of
function may occur:

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ Twist the cable excessively (more
than 180 degrees).

∙ The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.

∙ Do not force the iPod® cable connector into the device port.

∙ Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in
(40 mm) radius maximum).

∙ Pull or drop the cable.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Close the center console lid on the
cable or connectors.
∙ Store objects with sharp edges in the
storage where the cable is stored.
∙ Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
∙ Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if
the cable and/or connectors are wet. It
may damage the iPod®.
∙ If the cable and connectors are exposed to water, allow the cable and/or
connectors to dry completely before
connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait
24 hours for it to dry).
∙ If the connector is exposed to fluids
other than water, evaporative residue
may cause a short between the connector pins. In this case, replace the
cable, otherwise damage to the iPod®
and a loss of function may occur.
∙ If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,
connectors cracked, contamination
such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not use the cable. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to replace the cable with a new
one.

∙ When not in use for extended periods of
time, store the cable in a clean, dust free
environment at room temperature and
without direct sun exposure.
∙ Do not use the cable for any other purposes other than its intended use in the
vehicle.
*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so
equipped)
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio.
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your
audio device before using it with this
system.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.
∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
∙ While an audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

5. RPT (repeat )/ RDM (random) button
6. TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button
7. AUX IN jack
8. AUX button
9. CD button
10. AM button
11. FM button
12. VOL
/

(volume)
control
(power) button

knob

13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
14. TRACK
15.

button

SEEK button

Audio main operation

LHA8804

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so
equipped)

2. CD insert slot

For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.

4. DISP (display) button

CD eject button

3. SCAN button

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

VOL (volume) control knob/
(power) button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the
(power) button. If you listen to the radio with the engine
not running, place the ignition in the ACC
position. The mode (radio or CD) that was
playing immediately before the system
was turned off resumes playing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the
(power) button again
turns the system off.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the
right to increase volume or to the left to
decrease volume.
MENU button (Bass, Treble, Balance,
Fade, Speed Sensitive Volume and
Clock)
Press the MENU button to change the
mode as follows:
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade → Spd.
Sen. Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) → AUX IN
Volume → Clock → Clock Adjust
To adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the MENU button until the desired mode appears in the display. Press
SEEK or TRACK
button to
the
adjust the setting to the desired level (-5 to
+5). Balance adjusts the sound between
the right and left speakers. Fade adjusts
the sound between the front and rear
speakers.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality
to the desired level, press the MENU button
repeatedly until the radio or CD display re-

appears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display
will automatically reappear after about
10 seconds.
Speed Sensitive Volume adjusts the volume of the audio system as the vehicle’s
driving speed changes. It can be set as
follows:
OFF → LOW → MID → HIGH
DISP (display) button
Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is
playing to change the text shown in the
audio display as follows:

Clock operation
To turn the clock display on or off, press the
MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” appears
on
the
display. Turn
the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to toggle the setting
(ON or OFF).
Clock set
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
“Adjust Clock: NO” appears on the display.
2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob
change to “Adjust Clock: YES”.

For CDs:

3. Press the MENU button.

Running Time → Album Title: → Artist
Name: → Song Title

4. When “Change Hour” appears, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
hours.

For MP3 CDs:
Running Time → Folder Title: → Album Title:
→ Artist Name: → Song Title:
If the text information is too long to fully be
displayed on the screen; press and hold the
DISP button for longer than 1.5 seconds to
scroll through the rest of the text.
Press the DISP (display) button while the
radio is playing to toggle the audio display
between station number and RDS.

5. Press MENU button.
6. When “Change Minute” appears, turn
the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust minutes.
7. Press MENU button to finish.
The display will return to the regular clock
display after 10 seconds if no further adjustment is performed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

FM/AM radio operation
AM and FM buttons
Press the AM button to change the band to
AM.
If another audio source is playing when the
AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
Press the FM button to change the band as
follows:
FM1 → FM2 → FM1
If another audio source is playing when the
FM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
SEEK and TRACK
(tuning) buttons
to tune from
Press the SEEK button
low to high frequencies and stop at the
next broadcasting station.

Press the TRACK button
to tune from
high to low frequencies and stop at the
next broadcasting station.
Press and hold either button to seek at a
faster speed.
SCAN (tuning) button
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in
the display window. Scan tuning begins
from low to high frequencies. Scan tuning
stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting
station that has sufficient signal strength.
When scanning, SCAN blinks in the display.
Pressing the SCAN button again during this
5 second period stops scan tuning and the
radio remains tuned to that station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be
set for the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep
sound is heard.

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player
operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact
disc into the slot with the label side up. The
compact disc is automatically pulled into
the slot and starts to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio turns off and the last used compact
disc starts to play.

SEEK and TRACK
(Fast Forward, Rewind)
buttons
When
the
SEEK
button
or
TRACK
button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc
plays at an increased speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed.
SEEK and TRACK
buttons
When the SEEK
button is pressed
while the compact disc is playing, the next
track following the present one starts to
play from the beginning. Press the
button several times to skip
SEEK
several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed, the CD advances one additional
track. The track number appears in the display window. (When the last track on the
compact disc is skipped, the first track is
played.)
button is pressed,
When the TRACK
the track being played returns to the bebutton sevginning. Press the TRACK

eral times to skip back several tracks. Each
time the button is pressed the CD moves
back one track.
RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button
Press the RPT/RDM button while a compact disc is playing to change the play pattern as follows:
CD:
TRACK REPEAT → DISC RANDOM → DISC
REPEAT
MP3/WMA CD:
FOLDER REPEAT → TRACK REPEAT → DISC
RANDOM → FOLDER RANDOM → DISC REPEAT
TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently
playing will be repeated.
DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on
the disc will be mixed during play.
DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will
be repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current
folder will be repeated.

SCAN (CDs) button
Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 seconds to scan all tracks of the current disc
for 10 seconds per track. The SCAN icon is
flashed during scan mode.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans
through all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN
button is pressed during scan mode.
CD EJECT
button is pressed with a
When the
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will
be ejected.
When the
button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc
will eject and the system will turn off.
AUX (Auxiliary) button
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from
a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
player or laptop computers.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX IN
jack.

FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in
the folder will be mixed during play.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

Press the MENU button repeatedly until
“AUX IN Volume” appears on the screen to
control the incoming volume level of the
auxiliary
input
device.
Turn
the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the level between 0 and +3.

LHA3016

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so
equipped)

2. RPT button

For additional information, refer to "Audio
operation precautions" in this section.

4. Display screen

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CD eject button

3. RDM button

5. SCAN button

Audio main operation

6. USB button

(power) button/ VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) butposition, then press the
ton. If you listen to the radio with the engine
not running, place the ignition in the ACC
position. The mode (radio or CD) that was
playing immediately before the system
was turned off resumes playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the
(power) button again
turns the system off.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the
right to increase volume or to the left to
decrease volume.

7. AUX button
8. A-Z button
9. ENTER button and TUNE/MENU knob
10.

(back) button

11. SETUP button
12. DISP button
13. Station select (1–6) buttons
14.

Forward and Backward
SEEK/TRACK buttons

15. VOL (volume)
(power) button
16. CD button
17. FM•AM button

control

knob/

AUX button
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from
a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX
button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack. Pressing the
AUX button repeatedly will cycle through
available input sources:

AUX line in → USB (if so equipped) → AUX
line in
NOTE:
Sources only shown in menu if they are
connected and/or detected.
DISP (display) button
Pressing the DISP button displays song information, if available, such as artist, album,
track name, folder name, and source.
NOTE:
The DISP button only provides this information in non-radio modes.
How to use the SETUP button
To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob until the desired item is selected on the menu list
and then press the ENTER button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

Menu item
Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
AUX Vol.
Clock
Set Time
ON/OFF
Format 12h:24h
Bluetooth
Language
List of Languages
Scroll Direction
Clockwise

Result
Selecting this item allows user to adjust various audio settings.
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options
are LOW, MID, and HIGH.
Selecting this item allows user to adjust various clock settings.
Allows user to set time manually.
Switches clock display on or off.
Allows user to change time format between 12 hour and 24 hour.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type A)” in this section.
Allows user to change system language.
Available language are Spanish, Portuguese, English, and French.
Allows user to change the scrolling direction used by the TUNE/MENU knob.
Select up or down and press ENTER button.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TUNE/MENU knob/Enter button
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to the left or
right to scroll and then press ENTER to select desired item.
Clock Set
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select
CLOCK.
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select
“set time”.

allow user to search for music alphabetically using the TUNE/MENU knob.
RDM and RPT button
When listening to music via USB or iPod®,
pressing the RDM button will shuffle the
songs being played. Pressing the RPT button will repeat the song being played.
(back) button
(back) button will return
Pressing the
the user to the previous menu.

FM/AM radio operation

6. Rotate the TUNE/MENU knob to adjust
hours.

FM-AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:

7. Press the ENTER button.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

5. Press the ENTER button.

8. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to adjust
minutes.
9. Press the ENTER button to finish.
The display will return to the regular clock
display after 10 seconds.
A–Z button
When listening to music via USB or iPod®,
pressing the A-Z button will launch a quick
search function in music browser that will

If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
If the FM-AM button is pressed for more
than 1.5 seconds, the AUTOSTORE function
will be initiated. The “AST” icon will appear
and “AUTOSTORE” may appear on the display screen, a beep is heard and the radio
mutes. The system will then automatically

detect the 6 stations with the strongest
frequency and save them as presets. Once
AUTOSTORE is complete, the “AST” icon will
disappear and “AUTOSTORE COMPLETE”
may appear on the display screen.
TUNE/MENU knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
or
to tune from low to high or high to
low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station. Hold either button to
tune continuously. Then release button
once desired frequency is reached.
Station select (1 to 6) memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be
set for the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual or SEEK tuning. Press and hold
any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

3. The station memory position (P1–P6)
will now be displayed next to the band.
Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded,
the system will turn on and the compact
disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and
the compact disc will start to play.

DISP button
When the DISP button is pressed while a CD
is playing, the display will change as follows:
CD:
Track Time → Album → Artist →Track Time
CD with MP3 or WMA:
Track time→ Folder title → Artist → Song
title → Track number
SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press

and

hold

the

SEEK/TRACK

or
for 1.5 seconds while
button
the compact disc is playing to reverse or
fast forward the track being played. The
compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK button

Press the SEEK/TRACK button
while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/TRACK
several times to skip forward
button
several tracks. If the last track on a CD is
skipped, the first track on the disc is played.
If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA
CD is skipped, the first track of the next
folder is played.
TUNE/MENU knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, press the ENTER button to view the
track list and press the button again to
view the folder list. To select a folder or
track, turn the TUNE/MENU knob to scroll
through the folders/songs and press the
ENTER button to make selection.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button (Preset station number 1) is pressed while a compact disc is
playing, the repeat mode is toggled.
RDM (random) button

while a
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
several
the SEEK/TRACK button
times to skip backward several tracks.

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When the RDM button (Preset station number 2) is pressed while a compact disc is
playing, the Random mode is toggled.

CD EJECT button
button is pressed with a
When the
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will
eject and the last source will be played.

Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port” in
this section.

LHA4457

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so
equipped)

2. RPT button

For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.

4. Display screen

CD eject button

3. RDM button

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

5. SCAN button
6.

SEEK/CAT buttons

7. iPod MENU button
8.

BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING/CLOCK button and
TUNE/SCROLL control knob
10. Station select (1–6) buttons
11. VOL (volume) knob /
ton
12. DISP button
13. MEDIA button
14. XM button*
15. FM•AM button

(power) but-

*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

Audio main operation
(power) button / VOL (volume) control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the
(power) button while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.

Audio
Bluetooth
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Brightness
Contrast
Clock Adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Speed Sensitive Vol.

AUX Vol.
Language Select

Takes you to the Bluetooth menu.
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and
right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear
speakers.
Adjust to brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Allows the user to set time manually.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as
the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the
more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting
of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display
will automatically reappear.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

Clock Set
1. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Clock Adjust”.

FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:

3. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

4. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust hours.

If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.

5. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.
6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
minutes.
7. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.
8. Press the

BACK button to finish.

iPod MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® operations. For additional information, refer to
“iPod® player operation” in this section.
DISP (display) button
The DISP (display) button turns the display
screen on or off.
BACK button
BACK button to return to
Press the
the previous menu screen.

XM band select
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last
played.
The last station played will also come on
(power) button is pressed
when the
on.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning
SEEK button or
Press the
TRACK button to tune from low to high or
high to low frequencies and to stop at the
next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can
be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for
XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or
choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or
XM3 using the XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and
the sound is briefly muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.

at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed.
SEEK/CAT button

MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text information. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as
well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button
or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact
disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The compact disc plays

while a
Press the SEEK/CAT button
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
several times
the SEEK/CAT button
to skip backward several tracks.
while a
Press the SEEK/CAT button
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,
the first track on the disc is played. If the last
track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

RPT (repeat) button

CD with MP3 or WMA:

Additional features

When the RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:

1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF

For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation” in this section.

CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
EJECT button
button is pressed with a
When the
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will
eject and the last source will be played.
When the
button is pressed twice
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected further for easier CD
removal. If the disc is not removed within
20 seconds, the disc will reload.

CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port” in
this section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio” in this section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB connection port is located beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.

The port is illuminated for better visibility
when the headlight switch is in the ON position.

Audio file operation
AUX or USB button (if so equipped)
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX or USB button
to switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is
playing or another audio source is plugged
in through the AUX IN jack, the AUX or USB
button toggles between the three sources.
MEDIA button (if so equipped)
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button to
switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is
playing or another audio source is plugged
in through the AUX IN jack located in the
center console, the MEDIA button toggles
between the three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being
played can be displayed on the display
screen of the vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the audio files are encoded, information such as Folder, Song
and Artist will be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

The track number and number of total
tracks in the folder are displayed on the
screen as well.

last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

RDM (random) button

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

(Reverse or Fast For-

When the RDM button is pressed while an
audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:

The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.

All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF

TUNE/MENU or TUNE/SCROLL knob

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will
be played randomly.

If there are multiple folders with audio files
on the USB device, turn the TUNE/MENU or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders.
Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of
audio files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/MENU or TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the first track on
the USB device.

ward) button
or
SEEK/CAT
Press and hold the
and TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an
audio file on the USB device is playing to
reverse or fast forward the track being
played. The track plays at an increased
speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the audio file
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to return to the beginning of the
current track. Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
button
several times to skip backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to advance one track. Press the
SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while an
audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB Connection port located beneath
the heater and air conditioner controls.
Connect the iPod®-specific end of the
cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the
cable to the USB Connection port on the
vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via

a USB connection, its battery will be
charged while connected to the vehicle
with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. The port is illuminated for better
visibility when the headlight switch is in the
ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB Connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version
1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version
1.1.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version
2.0.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.0.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB)
(firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware
version 3.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware
version 4.3.5 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)

SEEK/CAT or TRACK

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

buttons

∙ iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)
∙ iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, press the iPod MENU button
or MEDIA button repeatedly to switch to
the iPod® mode.

Press

the

SEEK/CAT

TRACK

or
to skip backward or
buttons
forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
or
for 1.5 seconds while
buttons
a track is playing to reverse or fast forward
the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast
forwarding. When the button is released,
the track returns to normal play speed.

If the audio system is turned off while the
iPod® is playing, the iPod® plays when the
audio system is turned back on.

(RPT) REPEAT
When the RPT button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:

If the audio system is off, pressing the iPod
MENU button or MEDIA button turns the
audio system on and plays the iPod®.

Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off

If the audio system is on, the audio system
automatically begins playing tracks from
the iPod® when it is plugged into the connection port.

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or
later)

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are
repeated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.

(RDM) RANDOM

NOTE:

When the RDM button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:

For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle
→ Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list
will be played randomly.
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.
BACK button
BACK button is pressed, it
When the
returns to the previous menu.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
(if so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers. For additional information, refer
to “FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player” in this section.

LHA2775

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
the “Bluetooth” option.
3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Add Phone or Device”. This same
screen can be accessed to remove, replace or select a different Bluetooth®
device.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

4. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset. The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.

∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil as
illustrated.

Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen with the following information
listed:
∙ Album
∙ Song
∙ Artist

LHA0049

CD CARE AND CLEANING
∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend
the disc. Never touch the surface of the
disc.
∙ Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
∙ Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.

4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SOURCE switch
Push the SOURCE switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 (satellite radio, if so
equipped) → XM2 (satellite radio, if so
equipped) → XM3 (satellite radio, if so
equipped) → CD* → USB/iPod®*→
Bluetooth® Audio* (if so equipped) → AUX*
→ AM.
* These modes are only available when
compatible media storage is inserted into
the device or connected to the system.
LHA2054

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
The audio system can be operated using
the controls on the steering wheel.
1. SOURCE switch
2. Tuning switch
3. Volume control switch

Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch up or down
to increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch
For most audio sources, pushing the tuning switches for more than 1.5 seconds
provides a different function than pressing
for less than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM:
switch for less than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
preset station.

∙ Push the
switch for more than
1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the
next station.
XM (if so equipped):
switch for less than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
preset station.
switch for more than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to go to the next or previous
category.
iPod® (if so equipped):
switch for less than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
track number.
CD:
switch for less than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
track number.
∙ Push the
switch for more than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
folder number (if playing compressed
audio files).
USB (if so equipped):
∙ Push the
switch for less than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
track number.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
∙ Push the
switch for more than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
folder number.
Bluetooth®Audio (if so equipped):
∙ Push the
switch for less than
1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the
next song.
∙ Push the
switch for more than
1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward
the current song.

ANTENNA
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can
be removed. When you need to remove the
antenna, turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna
rod clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION
∙ Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation or the antenna
rod may break during vehicle
operation.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.

WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended.
Exercise extreme caution at all times
so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash.

4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.

LHA3662

Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically connected

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can connect up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the invehicle phone module before using the
hands-free phone system.
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a
recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.

4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pressed before the initialization
completes, the system will announce
“Hands-free phone system not ready” and
will not react to voice commands.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements
of
the
Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe
the following:

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-

Operating tips

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises,
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice
commands correctly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press and release the
button located
on the steering wheel. After the tone
sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
∙ If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat them.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Make sure
the command is said exactly as
prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.
∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.
∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the Voice
Recognition session. You can also press
button on the steerand hold the
ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition session is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, press the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume
control knob.

∙ Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.

∙ In most cases you can interrupt the
voice feedback to speak the next combutton on
mand by pressing the
the steering wheel.

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two
sixty two hundred,” and

∙ To use the system faster, you may
speak the second level commands with
the main menu command on the main
butmenu. For example, press the
ton and after the tone say, “Call Redial.”

∙ Numbers can be spoken in small
groups. The system will prompt you to
continue entering digits, if desired.

How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following rules and examples.
∙ Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two
oh oh”, or
– “One eight zero zero six six two six
two oh oh”

Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight hundred six six two six
two oh oh”,

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty
two hundred”

Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “Six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “Six two zero zero”
∙ Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (available when using the “Special Number”
command and the “Send” command
during a call).

4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

For additional information, refer to “List
of voice commands” and “Special
number” in this section.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two
star one two three”
∙ Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using the “Special Number” command).
∙ Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available only when storing a phonebook
number).
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at
any time. Please use the “Help” command
to get information on how to use the system.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
button on the steering
pressing the
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.

One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
example, press the
button and after
the tone say, “Call Redial”.

You can also use the
button to interrupt the system
feedback and give a command at once. For additional
information, refer to “List of
voice commands” and “During
a call” in this section.

LHA3002

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate a Voice Recognition session or answer an incoming
call.

PHONE/END
While the Voice Recognition
system is active, press and
button for
hold the
5 seconds to quit the Voice
Recognition system at any
time.
TUNING SWITCH
While using the Voice Recognition system, tilt the tuning
switch up or down to manually control the phone system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional information, refer to “List
of voice commands” in this section.

Choosing a language
You can interact with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System using English,
Spanish or French.
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the
more than 5 seconds.

button for

2. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND
button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
voice adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END
button to select a
different language.”
3. Press the

button.

For information on voice adaptation,
refer to “Voice adaptation (VA) mode” in
this section.

4. The system announces the current
language and gives you the option to
change the language to Spanish (in
Spanish) or French (in French). To select
the current language, press the
PHONE/SEND
button. To select a
different language, tilt the tuning
switch
or
left or right.
NOTE:
button within
You must press the
5 seconds to change the language.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After
5 seconds, the Voice Recognition session will end, and the language will not
be changed.

Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.

4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Main Menu
A
“Connect phone” 䊊
B
“Add phone” 䊊

C
Initiate from handset 䊊
D
Name phone 䊊

1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the
available commands.
A . The system
2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊
acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.
B . The system ac3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊
knowledges the command and asks
you to initiate connecting from the
C .
phone handset 䊊

The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone
Owner’s Manual. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

When prompted for a pin code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The pin code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN
and cannot be changed.
4. The system asks you to say a name for
D.
the phone 䊊
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for
a name again.
Also, if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too
much like a name already used, the
system tells you, then prompts you for
a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
A
“Call” 䊊

B
“Phone Number” 䊊

C
Speak the digits 䊊
D
“Dial” 䊊

1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. A tone will sound.

A . The system acknowl2. Say: “Call” 䊊
edges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.

D . The system acknowl6. Say: “Dial” 䊊
edges the command and makes the
call.

B . The system
3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊
acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

For additional command options, refer to
“List of voice commands” in this section.

Say: “Special Number” to dial more
than 10 digits or any special characters.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit
C . If the system has trouble
format 䊊
recognizing the correct phone number,
try entering the number in the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-digit
prefix and the last 4-digits. For example, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three
five four” as the 3rd group. For dialing
more than 10 digits or any special characters, say “Special Number”. For additional information refer to “How to say
numbers” in this section.
5. When you have finished speaking the
phone number, the system repeats it
back and announces the available
commands.

Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press
the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the
button on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when
you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
For additional command options, refer to
“List of voice commands” in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

When you press and release the
button on the steering wheel, you can choose
from the commands on the Main Menu.
The following pages describe these commands and the commands in each submenu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to
hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a
response.
If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at
any time the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the Voice Recognition session. Whenever the Voice Recognition session is canceled, a double beep
is played to indicate you have exited the
system.
If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction”
any time the system is waiting for a response.

B
(Speak Digits) 䊊

“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”
A
(Speak name) 䊊

“Phone Number”
B
(Speak Digits) 䊊

C
“Special Number” 䊊

D
“Redial” 䊊

E
“Call Back” 䊊

A
(Speak name) 䊊

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you can dial a number associated
with a name.
For additional information, refer to “Phonebook (phones without automatic phonebook download function)” in this section.
When prompted by the system, say the
name of the phone book entry you wish to
call. The system acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple numbers associated
with the name, the system asks you to
choose the correct number.
Once you have confirmed the name and
location, the system begins the call.

4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When prompted by the system, say the
number you wish to call. For additional information, refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone
number” in this section.
C
“Special Number” 䊊

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say “Special Number”. When
the system acknowledges the command,
the system will prompt you to speak the
number.
D
“Redial” 䊊

Use the Redial command to call the last
number that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command,
repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to
redial” and ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session.
E
“Call Back” 䊊

Use the Call Back command to dial the
number of the last incoming call within the
vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command,
repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a call back number does not exist, the
system announces, “There is no number to
call back” and ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session.
During a call
During a call there are several command
button
options available. Press the
on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter commands.
∙ “Help” — The system announces the
available commands.
∙ “Go back/Correction” — The system announces “Go back,” ends the Voice Recognition session and returns to the call.
∙ “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the Voice Recognition
session and returns to the call.
∙ “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”
during a call. For example, if you were
directed to dial an extension by an automated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated
with the numbers. The system then
ends the Voice Recognition session
and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
∙ “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call
command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
to the cellular phone when privacy is
desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call.
Call transferred to privacy mode.” The
system then ends the Voice Recognition session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular
phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
button.
System, press the
∙ “Mute” — Use the Mute command to
mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it. Use the mute command
again to unmute your voice.

NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the
Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will
be reset to “off” for the next call so the
other party can hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not
available when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
A
“Transfer Entry” 䊊

B
“Delete Entry” 䊊
C
“List Names” 䊊

For phones that do not support automatic
download of the phonebook (PBAP
Bluetooth® profile), the “Phonebook” command is used to manually add entries to
the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for
each phone connected to the system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s
phonebook if you are currently connected with Phone B.
A
“Transfer Entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a
new name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the
name you would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a
name already stored, the system tells you,
then prompts you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s
memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one
two.” For additional information, refer to
“How to say numbers” in this section.

To transfer a phone number stored in the
cellular phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset.
The new contact phone number will be
transferred from the cellular phone via the
Bluetooth® communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to
each cellular phone. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.

C
“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all
the names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries
but does not include the actual phone
numbers. When the playback of the list is
complete, the system goes back to the
main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any
time by pressing the
button on the
steering wheel. The system ends the Voice
Recognition session.

The system repeats the number and
prompts you for the next command. When
you have finished entering numbers or
transferring an entry, choose “Store.”

“Phonebook” (phones with
automatic phonebook download
function)

The system confirms the name, location
and number.

NOTE:

B
“Delete Entry” 䊊

The “Transfer Entry” command is not
available when the vehicle is moving.

Use the Delete Entry command to erase
one entry from the phonebook. After the
system recognizes the command, speak
the name to delete or say “List Names” to
choose an entry.

4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Main Menu
“Phonebook”
Say a Name
A
“List Names” 䊊

B
“Record Name” 䊊

For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth®
profile), the “Phonebook” command is used
to manage entries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of an entry at
this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1,000 names
for each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system,
the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle. This feature allows
you to access your phonebook from the
Bluetooth® system and call contacts by
name. You can record a custom voice tag
for contact names that the system has difficulty recognizing.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s
phonebook if you are currently connected with Phone B. For additional information, refer to “Record name” in this
section.
A
“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all
the names and locations in the phone
book.

The system recites the phone book entries
but does not include the actual phone
numbers. When the playback of the list is
complete, the system goes back to the
main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any
time by pressing the
button on the
steering wheel. The system ends the Voice
Recognition session. For additional information, refer to “Record name” in this section.
B
“Record Name” 䊊
The system allows you to record custom
voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial an entry with
multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice tags can
be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
A
“Outgoing” 䊊

B
“Incoming” 䊊
C
“Missed” 䊊

Use the Recent Calls command to access
outgoing, incoming or missed calls.

A
“Outgoing” 䊊

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing calls made from the vehicle.
B
“Incoming” 䊊

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made to the vehicle.
C
“Missed” 䊊

Use the Missed command to list the calls
made to the vehicle that were not answered.

“Connect Phone”
NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
A
“Add Phone” 䊊

B
“Select Phone” 䊊

C
“Delete Phone” 䊊

D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Connect Phone commands to
manage the phones connected to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth® function
on the vehicle.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

A
“Add Phone” 䊊
Use the Add Phone command to add a
phone to the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Connecting procedure” in
this section.
B
“Select Phone” 䊊

Use the Select Phone command to select
from a list of phones connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt
you for the phone you wish to select. Only
one phone can be active at a time.
C
“Delete Phone” 䊊

Use the Delete Phone command to delete
a phone that is connected to the vehicle.
The system will list the names assigned to
each phone and then prompt you for the
phone you wish to delete. Deleting a phone
from the vehicle will also delete the phonebook for that phone.
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to
prevent a wireless connection to your
phone.

VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE
Voice Adaptation (VA) allows up to two outof-dialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a
number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is
stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different Voice Adaptation model for each connected phone.

Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably
quiet outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in P (Park).
3. Press and hold the
more than 5 seconds.

button for

4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND
button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
voice adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END
button to select a
different language.”

4-60 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5. Press the

button.

For additional information on selecting
a different language, refer to “Choosing
a language” in this section.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory
locations are already in use, the system
will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the
system.
7. When preparation is complete and you
are ready to begin, press the
button.
8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow
the instructions provided by the system.
9. When training is finished, the system
will tell you an adequate number of
phrases have been recorded.
10. The system will announce that voice
adaptation has been completed and
the system is ready.

∙ delete all entries

∙ delete phone

button is pressed for more
∙ The
than 5 seconds in VA mode.

∙ call seven two four zero nine

∙ dial eight three zero five one

∙ phonebook delete entry

∙ record name

∙ The vehicle begins moving during VA
mode.

∙ next entry

∙ four three pause two nine pause zero

∙ dial star two one seven oh

∙ delete redial number

∙ yes

∙ phonebook list names

Training phrases

∙ no

∙ call eight oh five four one

During the Voice Adaptation mode, the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. The system will prompt you for
each phrase.

∙ select

∙ correction

∙ missed

∙ connect phone

∙ dial eight five six nine two

∙ dial seven four oh one eight

∙ phonebook transfer entry

∙ Bluetooth on

∙ previous entry

∙ dial three oh four two nine

∙ outgoing

∙ delete

∙ delete call back number

∙ call three one nine oh two

∙ dial nine seven two six six

∙ incoming

∙ nine seven pause pause three oh eight

∙ call seven six three oh one

∙ transfer entry

∙ cancel

∙ go back

∙ eight pause nine three two pause seven

∙ call back number

∙ call five six two eight zero

∙ call star two zero nine five

∙ dial six six four three seven

The VA mode will stop if:

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
or LOCK position.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system,
it is possible to select menu options by
using the steering wheel controls instead
of speaking voice commands. The manual
control mode does not allow dialing a
phone number by digits. The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit the manual control mode by
pressing
and
holding
the
button. At that time,
PHONE/END
pressing the PHONE/SEND
button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips
∙ To enter manual control mode, start the
Voice Recognition system and push the
tuning switch
. The system will
speak "Showing Manual Options" when
manual controls are initially activated.
∙ To browse the menu options, push the
tuning switch
. The system will always speak the current menu option.
Depending on the audio display, it will
also show the current menu option.
∙ To select the current menu option,
press the PHONE/SEND
button.
∙ To go back to the previous menu, press
button. If the curthe PHONE/END
rent menu is the Main Menu, pressing
the PHONE/END
button will exit
the Phone system.
∙ To exit the manual control mode, press
and hold the PHONE/END
button
for 5 seconds.

4-62 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from
the phone book.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” in this
section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in
the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. For additional information, refer to “Voice
Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be
confirmed by using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook (phones
without automatic phonebook download function)” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.

LHA3506

4-64 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatic ally to the system, consult the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on
device operation.

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.

You can connect up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.

∙ Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular
phone may discharge quicker than usual.
The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.
∙ For additional information, you can visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements
of
the
Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pressed before the initialization
completes, the system will announce
“Hands-free phone system not ready” and
will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises,
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice
commands correctly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.

4-66 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press and release the
button located
on the steering wheel. After the tone
sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
∙ If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat them.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Make sure
the command is said exactly as
prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.
∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.

∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the Voice
Recognition session. You can also press
and hold the
button on the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition session is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume
control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
example, press the
button and after
the tone say, “Call Redial”.
LHA3002

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate a Voice Recognition session or answer an incoming
call.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-67

You can also use the
button to interrupt the system feedback and give a
command at once. For additional information, refer to
“Voice commands” and “During a call” in this section.

PHONE/END
While the Voice Recognition
system is active, press and
button for
hold the
5 seconds to quit the Voice
Recognition system at any
time.
Tuning switch
While using the Voice Recognition system, tilt the tuning
switch up or down to manually control the phone system.

Menu Item
Bluetooth ON/OFF
On
Off
Add Phone
Delete Phone
Replace Phone
Select Phone

CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.

Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality on
Turns Bluetooth® functionality off
Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and
complete the connection process.
Delete a phone currently connected to the system.
Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded
using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with Voice Recognition.
Choose a phone from a list of previously connected or currently connected phones.

The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual.

4-68 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
button and say “Phone” to
Press the
bring up the phone command menu. The
available options are:
∙ Call
∙ Phonebook
∙ Recent Calls
∙ Messaging (if available)
∙ Select Phone

“Call”
For additional information, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.

“Phonebook”
The following commands are available under “Phonebook”:

∙ (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring
up a list of options for that phonebook
entry. The system will say the name it
interpreted based on the voice command provided. If the name is incorrect,
say “Correction” to hear another name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is
identified, say “Dial” to dial the number
or “Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Record Name” to record a name for the phonebook entry.
Say “Delete Recording” to delete a recorded name for the phonebook entry.
∙ List Names
Speak this command to have the system list the names in the phonebook
one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to
dial the number of the current name or
“Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook entry.

“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under “Recent Calls”:
∙ Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the incoming call will
be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of incoming calls.
∙ Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the missed call will be
displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of
missed calls.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-69

∙ Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the outgoing call
will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of outgoing calls.

“Select Phone”

∙ Redial
Speak this command to call the last
number dialed.

Available commands different if system
is in Manual Control mode. For additional
information, refer to “Manual Control” in
this section.

∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging”(if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text messaging functions. For additional information, refer to “Text messaging” in this section.

Speak this command to select a phone to
use from a list of those phones connected
to the vehicle.

MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to
the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System:
NOTE:

1. Press the

button.

2. The system will prompt you for a command. Say “Call”.
3. Select one of the available voice commands to continue:

4-70 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ “(a name)” — Speak the name of a
phonebook entry to place a call to that
entry. The system will respond with the
name it interpreted from your command and will prompt you to confirm
that the name is correct. Say “Yes” to
initiate the call or “No” to hear another
name from the phonebook.
∙ “List Names” – Speak this command to
have the system list the names in the
phonebook one by one alphabetically.
Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to
move through the list alphabetically.
Say “Select” once desired contact is
heard and displayed on screen. Say
“Dial” to dial the number of the current
name or say “Record Name” to record a
name for the current phonebook entry
to be assigned.

∙ “Phone Number” — Speak this command
to place a call by inputting numbers. For
7– to 10–digit phone number, speak the
numbers. Say “Correction” at any time in
the process to correct a misspoken or
misinterpreted number. For phone numbers with more digits or special characters, say “Special Number”, then speak the
digits. Up to 24 digits can be entered.
Available special characters are “start”,
“pound”, “plus”, and “pause”. When finished,
say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time in the process to correct
a misspoken or misinterpreted number
or character.
∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Re-dialing
”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it
available, otherwise the number being
re-dialed will be displayed.
∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to
dial the number of the last incoming
call. The system will display “Calling
back ”. The name of
the phonebook entry will be displayed if
it available, otherwise the number being called back will be displayed.

button to accept the call.
button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the
button
to access additional options. Speak one of
the following commands:
∙ “(numbers)” – Speak numbers and then
say “Send” or say “Correction” to change
the numbers entered.
∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the
command to mute or unmute the system.
∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To
transfer the call back from the handset
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, press the
button and
confirm when prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call
waiting functionality. If a call is received
while another call is already active, a message will be displayed on the screen. Press
the
button to hold the active call and
switch to the second call. Press the
button to reject the second call.
While the second call is active, pressing
button will allow the same comthe
mands that are available during any call
and additional commands:
∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to
hold the second call and switch back to
the original call.
∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command
to stay with the second call and end the
original call.
Press the
button to accept the call.
Press the
button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the
ton.

but-

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-71

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech.”
Check local regulations before using
the feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.

NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if
the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and
instructions.
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to your phone’s Owner’s Manual.
Text message integration requires that
the phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some phones may
not support all text messaging features.
For additional information, refer to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information, as well as your device’s Owner’s Manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.

4-72 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Sending a text message:
1. Press the

button.

2. Say “Messaging”.
3. The system will prompt you for a command. Say “Send Text”.
4. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ (a name)
∙ Number
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
∙ Missed Calls
For additional information, refer to
“Voice commands” in this section.

∙ Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the displayed list. The system will ask to confirm before deleting the phone.
∙ Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the displayed list. When a selection is made,
the system will ask to confirm before
proceeding. The recorded phonebook
for the phone being deleted will be
saved as long as the new phone’s
phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
LHA2274

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button:
∙ Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
∙ Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to
“Connecting procedure” in this section.

∙ Select Phone or Device
Select to connect to a previously connected phone from the displayed list.
∙ Show Incoming Calls
Incoming call information may be displayed on the center display screen.
∙ Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic
download of a connected phone’s
phonebook.
∙ Text Message
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.

∙ New Text Sound
Select to adjust the volume of the
sound that plays when a new text is
received by a phone connected to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
The setting all the way to the left indicates that the new text sound will be
muted.
∙ Show Incoming Text
Incoming text messages may be displayed on the center display screen. Select “None” to have no display of incoming text messages.
∙ Edit Custom Messages
Select to set a custom message that
will be available with the standard options when sending a text message. To
set a custom message, send a text
message to your own phone number
while the phone is connected to the
system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be
set while the vehicle is stationary.
∙ Auto Reply
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply
function. When enabled, the vehicle will
automatically send a predefined text
message to the sender when a text
message is received while driving.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-73

∙ Auto Reply Message
Select to choose the message that is
sent when the Auto Reply function is
enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or
one of the three custom messages
stored in the system.
∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off
Select to choose whether or not the
vehicle signature is added to outgoing
text messages from the vehicle. This
message cannot be changed or customized.

MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system,
it is possible to select menu options by
using the steering wheel controls instead
of speaking voice commands. The manual
control mode does not allow dialing a
phone number by digits. The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate Voice Recognition, exit the manual control mode by
pressing
and
holding
the
PHONE/END
button. At that time,
pressing the PHONE/SEND
button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.

4-74 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Continuously Variable Transmission
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Ignition switch positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-15
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-30

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.

5-2 Starting and driving

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length
of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, doors
and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed
while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must
drive with one of these open, follow
these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Turn the air recirculation mode off
and set the fan speed control to
the highest level to circulate the
air.
∙ The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system,
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.

WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away
from
the
exhaust
system
components.
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability
to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming
it up.
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of
the spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure of your tires are adjusted. After
the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn
off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure.
∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed in the odometer when the low tire pressure warning
light is illuminated and low tire pressure
is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns off when the low tire
pressure warning light turns off.

5-4 Starting and driving

∙ The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire
pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning
message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON posilow tire prestion as long as the
sure warning light remains illuminated.
∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is not displayed if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature.
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
driving because the tire pressure rises
after driving. Low outside temperature
can lower the temperature of the air
inside the tire which can cause a lower
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four
tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
is located in the driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for possible influences
before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon
as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.)
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning
light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION
∙ The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried in
snow.
∙ Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception
of the signals from the tire pressure
sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Starting and driving 5-5

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which

5-6 Starting and driving

may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires
are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving
lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.

WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may
cause a collision and result in personal
injury.
∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and contact a roadside emergency
service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the
likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident,
alcohol can increase the severity of the
injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the
influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of
people are injured or killed in alcohol-related
collisions. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated,
the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.

Starting and driving 5-7

IGNITION SWITCH
When the ignition switch cannot be placed
in the LOCK position:

WARNING
∙ Never remove the ignition key or place
the ignition switch in the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel
will lock. This may cause the driver to
lose control of the vehicle and could
result in serious vehicle damage or
personal injury.

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Move the ignition switch slightly in the
ON direction.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the
ignition switch.

SSD0392

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position until the shift lever is moved
to the P (Park) position.
∙ When placing the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, make sure that the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
∙ When removing the key from the ignition switch (if it is inserted), make sure
that the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

5-8 Starting and driving

If the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position, the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position.
The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.
1 between the
There is an OFF position 䊊
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
To lock the steering wheel, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering
wheel, insert the key and turn it gently
while rotating the steering wheel slightly
right and left.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (1)

WSD0052

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that
helps prevent accidental removal of the
key while driving.
The key can only be removed when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked,
it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.

The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

∙ Lock all doors.

This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is
not running.

∙ Position seat and
restraints/headrests.

ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system
and the electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as
the engine has started, release the key. It
automatically returns to the ON position.

adjust

head

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information,
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

Starting and driving 5-9

STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
models:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is
turned to the OFF position or if the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
Manual transmission (M/T) models:
For best practice when operating an
M/T, depressing the clutch before
moving the shift lever is ideal.
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
while cranking the engine.
The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.

5-10 Starting and driving

3. Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by turning the
ignition key to the START position. Release the key when the engine starts. If
the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat
the above procedure.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and hold it and then crank the
engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Crank the engine for
5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by turning the
ignition key to the START position. Release the key when the engine starts.
If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, turn the key off and wait
10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need
to be charged to maintain battery
health.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.

CAUTION
∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power
and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

Starting and driving 5-11

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the
key is removed.

1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever into a driving
gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually
start the vehicle in motion.

LSD2013

To move the shift lever:
A while depressing
Press the button 䊊
the brake pedal

4. Stop the vehicle completely before
moving the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
The Continuously Variable Transmission
is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST
be depressed before shifting from P
(Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

5-12 Starting and driving

A to shift
Press the button 䊊
A
Shift without pressing the button 䊊

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever from P
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any drive position,
the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition
switch. If this occurs, perform the following
steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) to park
the vehicle and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK position to remove
the key.
P (Park)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button
pressed in to move the shift lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then place
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

N (Neutral)

R (Reverse)

L (Low)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.

Use this position for engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep
slopes and whenever approaching sharp
bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in
any other circumstances.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. R (Reverse) speed is limited to
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h) in the R (Reverse) position. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the
shift lever button pressed in to move the
shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or
any drive position to R (Reverse).

Starting and driving 5-13

∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also
be used.
4. Push down the shift lock release using
a suitable tool.
A and
5. Press the shift lever button 䊊
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift
lock release.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position to unlock the steering wheel.
7. Release the parking brake.
LSD2011

Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift lever
may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the foot brake pedal depressed.
To move the shift lever, perform the following procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover.

5-14 Starting and driving

The vehicle may be moved to the desired
location.
Replace the removed shift lock release
cover after the operation.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the
P (Park) position, have the Continuously
Variable Transmission system checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2012

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with
the shift lever in the D (Drive) position,
light in the instrument panel illuthe
minates. For additional information, refer
to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Use the overdrive OFF mode when you
need improved engine braking.
To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push
indithe O/D OFF switch again. The
cator light will turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when
the shift lever is shifted to any position
other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF
mode will be automatically turned off.

Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the
Continuously Variable Transmission will
not be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then place the ignition switch back in the ON position. The
vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its
normal operating condition, have the
transmission checked and repaired, if
necessary. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower
than other traffic, which could increase
the chance of a collision. Be especially
careful when driving. If necessary, pull
to the side of the road at a safe place
and allow the transmission to return to
normal operation, or have it repaired if
necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)

∙ Do not over-rev the engine when
shifting to a lower gear. This may
cause a loss of control or engine
damage.
∙ Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in
an accident due to loss of engine
braking.

CAUTION
∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving. This may cause
clutch damage.
∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
∙ Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.

WARNING
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.

Starting and driving 5-15

On the manual transmission, you cannot shift
directly from 5th gear into R (Reverse). First
shift into N (Neutral), then into R (Reverse).
The shift lever ring returns to its original
position when the shift lever is moved to
the N (Neutral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the
clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested up-shift speeds
SSD0535

Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or
downshifting, depress the clutch pedal
fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then
release the clutch slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the
shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed before the transmission is
shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage could occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,
3rd, 4th and up to 5th gear in sequence
according to vehicle speed.

5-16 Starting and driving

The following are suggested vehicle
speeds for shifting into a higher gear.
These suggestions relate to fuel economy
and vehicle performance. Actual upshift
speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
GEAR CHANGE
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th

mph (km/h)
9 (14)
12 (19)
21 (34)
28 (45)
—

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas
and high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th

mph (km/h)
15 (24)
25 (40)
40 (64)
45 (72)
—

Suggested maximum speed in
each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested
speed (shown below) in any gear. For level
road driving, use the highest gear suggested
for that speed. Always observe posted
speed limits, and drive according to the road
conditions, which will ensure safe operation.
Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to
a lower gear as it may cause engine damage
or loss of vehicle control.
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th

mph (km/h)
28 (46)
52 (83)
76 (122)
103 (166)
—

PARKING BRAKE
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
B and
lever slightly, press the button 䊊
lower the lever completely.

WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.

WSD0169

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up
A .
䊊
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
Continuously Variable Transmission
models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-17

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
∙ On winding or hilly roads.
∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
∙ In very windy areas.
LSD2430

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically.
∙ To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.

5-18 Starting and driving

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not
shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise
control is set. Should this occur, depress
the clutch pedal and turn the ON/OFF
switch off immediately. Failure to do so
may cause engine damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light
in the instrument panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it. The
CRUISE indicator light in the instrument
panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the
set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument panel
goes out.

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
switch.

∙ Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indicator light goes out.
∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument panel
goes out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled and the CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument panel goes out if:
∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal
while pushing the ACCEL/RES or
SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is
deleted from memory.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ You depress the clutch pedal (manual
transmission), or move the shift lever
into N (Neutral) (Continuously Variable
Transmission).

To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you
desire, release the switch.
∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed increases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows to the desired speed.
∙ Push and release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-19

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do
not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.

5-20 Starting and driving

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
5. Use Cruise Control
∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed.
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save
time.
7. Avoid Idling
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll
Roads
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.

Starting and driving 5-21

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) or in
an appropriate gear for manual transmission (M/T) models. Failure to do so
could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an
accident. Make sure the shift lever has
been pushed as far forward as it can
go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.

5-22 Starting and driving

Place the shift lever into the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill
grade, place the shift lever into 1st gear.
Continuously Variable Transmission
models:
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.

POWER STEERING
1 :
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
2 :
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3 :
CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.

WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or
driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the
power steering system goes down, the
power assist level will return to normal.
Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-

erations that could cause the power steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering
wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-23

BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
be longer.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to
skid and result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the brake shoes

5-24 Starting and driving

and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order
to assure the best brake performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain
a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.
∙ Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally but without anti-lock
assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.

Starting and driving 5-25

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a nonslipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
on vehicle speed (traction control function).
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

5-26 Starting and driving

When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes
so note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the
indicator light comes on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when this indicator light
is on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
VDC system. The
indicator illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to
prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
indicator flashes if this ocwheel. The
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
indicator will not flash.
the
The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator light may flash or
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
the
indicator
light
may
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the
indicator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator light may
flash or illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the front and rear wheels
depending on the radius of the turn.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.

Starting and driving 5-27

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator light may flash or
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
the
indicator
light
may
illuminate.

5-28 Starting and driving

∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the
indicator light may illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator light may
flash or illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob.

ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information,
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Doit-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, refer to “Battery”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
on all four wheels. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

the

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.

Starting and driving 5-29

∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist
with cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)
or lower.

5-30 Starting and driving

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
use the proper extension cord or a
grounded outlet can result in a fire or
electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault
Interrupt
(GFI)
protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2 to 4 hours,
depending on outside temperatures,
to properly warm the engine coolant.
Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck
vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

FLAT TIRE
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.

LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors
tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light is
lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)
warning message is displayed in the
odometer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS
will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section, and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or
the Continuously Variable Transmission into P (Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) or the Continuously Variable Transmission into P
(Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

In case of emergency 6-3

LCE2142

Blocks

Flat tire

SCE0913

To remove the spare tire, loosen the bolt by
turning counterclockwise. Once free, remove the bolt. Remove the spare tire.

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

LCE2020

Getting the spare tire and tools
1 .
Open the trunk. Lift the floorboard 䊊

To remove the jack, collapse the jack from
the storage location. If necessary, remove
the spare tire first to easily access the jack.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover
or wheel surface.

SCE0630

2 between the wheel and
Apply cloth 䊊
jacking rod to prevent damaging the wheel
and wheel cover.

LCE2235

Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles. The jack is designed
for lifting only your vehicle during a
tire change.

In case of emergency 6-5

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

LCE2059

Always refer to the proper illustrations for
the correct placement and jack-up points
for your specific vehicle model and jack
type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.

6-6 In case of emergency

2. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated so the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head between the 2 notches in the front or the
rear. Also fit the groove of the jack head
between the notches.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod with both hands. Carefully
raise the vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence as illusB ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ). Lower the vehicle
A ,䊊
trated (䊊
completely.

WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
WCE0048

Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ) until
sequence illustrated (䊊
they are tight.

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.

In case of emergency 6-7

JUMP STARTING

∙ The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information,
refer to specific instructions under
the heading “Wheels and tires” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.

WCE0157

6. Install the jack in its storage area and
tighten the jack screw clockwise.
7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk
floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.

WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

6-8 In case of emergency

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.

WCE0054

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the 2 vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (continuously variable transmission). Switch off all un-

necessary electrical systems (lights,
heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an
old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the seC ,䊊
D ).
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
quence illustrated (䊊

CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.

In case of emergency 6-9

PUSH STARTING

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start
the engine of the vehicle being jump
started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, turn the key
off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying
again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).
Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to
cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

CAUTION
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
∙ Continuously variable transmission
and manual transmission models
cannot be push-started or towstarted. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
∙ For manual transmission models,
never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to
collide with the tow vehicle.
∙ Continuously variable transmission
models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading (if so equipped), a High temperature
warning
light
(red)
(if
so
equipped)
), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc.
take the following steps.

WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while
the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
∙ Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (Continuously
Variable Transmission).
Do not stop the engine.

6-10 In case of emergency

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high
speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine). Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running.
Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial
in Canada) and local regulations for towing
must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN
dealer. Local service operators are generally
familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing
and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable
to have the service operator carefully read
the following precautions:

WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.

In case of emergency 6-11

For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing” in the “Technical and Consumer Information” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.

LCE2345

2WD models with Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.

6-12 In case of emergency

CAUTION
∙ Never tow Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
front wheels on the ground or four
wheels on the ground (forward or
backward), as this may cause serious
and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the
front wheels.

∙ When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).

LCE2346

2WD models with manual
transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illustrated.
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put
the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
Your vehicle speed should never exceed
60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your vehicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle
the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-

gine after every 500 miles of towing may
cause damage to the transmission’s internal parts.

CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ If you have to tow manual transmission models with the rear wheels on
the ground (if you do not use towing
dollies) or four wheels on the ground:
– Always release the parking brake.

In case of emergency 6-13

– Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position
– Observe the following restricted
towing speeds and distances for
manual transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles
(805 km)
When towing long distances or speeds in
excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission. For additional
information, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.

6-14 In case of emergency

∙ Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.
∙ Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) System.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (continuous variable transmission models) or 1st
(Low) and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (continuous variable transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (manual transmission
models).
∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . .
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . .

7-5
7-5
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the
body cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

The high-mounted stop light must be
properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.

CAUTION

WAI0007

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be
easier to clean if the high-mounted stop
light (if so equipped) is removed first.
Be careful when removing the highmounted stop light to reduce the risk of
damaging the high-mounted stop light
wires.
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1
䊊
2
䊊

Push toward rear of vehicle.

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.

Lift to remove.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR

CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after
the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.

7-4 Appearance and care

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather (if so
equipped) surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle
soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or
ammonia-based cleaners as they
may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precautions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.
LAI2010

FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.

Appearance and care 7-5

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.
∙ Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information,
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
section.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

7-6 Appearance and care

Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of
the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(manual transmission models) and
with the parking break fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so
that the floor mat grommet holes are
aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(manual transmission models) and
with the parking break applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.

CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
∙ The
accumulation
of
moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.

LAI2034

Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.

Appearance and care 7-7

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.

Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.

7-8 Appearance and care

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.

CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you consult
a NISSAN dealer.

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Variable voltage control system (if so
equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Key fob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which
should be closely observed.

WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever
to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move
the shift lever to P (Park).
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
∙ If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.

8-2 Do-it-yourself

∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure
even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for service of the fuel filter or
fuel lines.
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition key is in the OFF position and the
engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.

CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.

∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness
connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
HR16DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Drive belt location
Engine oil filler cap
Air cleaner
Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir
Fusible link
Battery
Engine coolant reservoir
Radiator cap
Engine oil dipstick
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3055

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.

WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives
may clog the cooling system and
cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer
to the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this
manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI2794

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
B , add coolant
level is below the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty,
to the MAX level 䊊
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
A .
level 䊊

For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this
section.

Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE OIL
It is normal to add some engine oil between oil maintenance intervals depending on the severity of operating
conditions or depending on the property
of the engine oil used. More engine oil is
consumed by frequent acceleration/
deceleration especially when the engine
rpm is high. Consumption is likely to be
higher when the engine is new. If the rate
of oil consumption, after driving for
3,000 miles (5,000 km), is more than
0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 km), consult
a NISSAN dealer
LDI3091

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.

8-6 Do-it-yourself

LDI2795

5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
B . This is the
(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊
normal operating oil level range. If the
A ,
oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊
remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening.
C .
Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
B.
plug 䊊
B with a
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
wrench by turning it counterclockwise
and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.

WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
LDI2788

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to burn yourself. The
engine oil may be hot.
∙ Waste oil
properly.

must

disposed

∙ Check your local regulations.
B
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug 䊊
and a new washer. Securely tighten the
B with a wrench. Do not use
drain plug 䊊
excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install
A securely.
the oil filler cap 䊊
For additional information on drain
and refill capacity, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
B.
filter 䊊

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
B and oil filter.
around the drain plug 䊊
Correct as required.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Then remove the oil filter by turning it
by hand.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.

CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of
the engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil .
LDI2789

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
13 ft-lb (18 N·m)

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so
equipped)
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add enA
gine oil by removing the oil filler cap 䊊
if necessary.

CAUTION
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused
by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid
is required, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
For additional information on brake fluid
specification, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and
clutch (if so equipped) systems. The
use of improper fluids can damage
the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of reach of
children.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

LDI2790

BRAKE FLUID

CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If
B , or the
the fluid level is below the MIN line 䊊
brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
A . If fluid must be
fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
added frequently, the system should be
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The
brake fluid reservoir is shared with the
clutch hydraulic system for manual transB,
missions. If the level is below the MIN line 䊊
or the brake warning light comes on, add
Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent
A . If fluid
DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
must be added frequently, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
servicing.

LDI2791

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Add a washer solvent to the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir for better cleaning. In
the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield-Washer Fluid Concentrate
Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

BATTERY

CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer solution. This may result in damage to the
paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the washer fluid concentrate and
water.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

WARNING

Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.

1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.

∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:

In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.

WDI0528

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown.

WDI0529

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
A is located near the
The current sensor 䊊
battery along the negative battery cable. If
you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable
body ground such as the frame or engine
block area.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2250

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

DRIVE BELT

SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is
in poor condition, have it replaced or
adjusted. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition.

LDI2399

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Water pump pulley
Generator pulley
Manual tensioner pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.

SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace platinumA spark plugs as frequently as contipped 䊊
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

AIR CLEANER

WARNING

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.

Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
A , then release
release the retaining clips 䊊
the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the
B.
unit upward 䊊

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
LDI2708

WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner filter
not only cleans the intake air, it also
stops the flame if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner is not installed
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Never drive with the air
cleaner filter off. Be cautious working
on the engine when the air cleaner is
off.

The viscous paper type filter element (if so
equipped) should not be cleaned and reused. The dry paper type filter element (if so
equipped) may be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance log shown in a separate maintenance booklet.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
of the air cleaner housing and the cover
with a damp cloth.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING

CAUTION

If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after
cleaning the blades and using the wiper,
install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.

LDI2725

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A , and
2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊
B
then move the wiper blade down 䊊
the wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. The rear
drum-type brakes self-adjust every time
the parking brake is applied.

Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brakes pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators
LDI2710

Be careful not to let anything get into the
D . This may cause clogging
washer nozzle 䊊
or improper windshield–washer operation.
If something gets into the nozzle, remove it
C .
with a needle or small pin 䊊

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

FUSES
For checking and replacing the fusible links,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.

LDI2385

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be
found in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is
installed in the fuse box securely.

LDI3023

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and the fuses are in good condition,
A in the holder. If
check the fusible links 䊊
any of the fusible links are melted, replace
only with Genuine NISSAN parts.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

LDI2712

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
A with a
2. Remove the fuse box cover 䊊
suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

LDI2713

C , replace it with an
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
D.
equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
B.
䊊

Do-it-yourself 8-19

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

LDI2747

Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage switch
and check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the extended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage
switch:
1. To remove the extended storage
switch, be sure the ignition switch is in
the OFF or LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the
OFF position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
A and 䊊
B found
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊
on each side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out
C .
from the fuse box 䊊

8-20 Do-it-yourself

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of
B and twist it to separate
the corner 䊊
the upper part from the lower part. Use
a cloth to protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
C .
bottom of the case 䊊
Recommended battery: CR1620 or equivalent.
4. Close the lid and install the screw securely.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

SDI2134A

KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:
A .
1. Remove the screw 䊊

If you need assistance for replacement, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
∙ An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

∙ The key fob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
∙ The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

LIGHTS
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.

JVM0002X

Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside

8-22 Do-it-yourself

the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

CAUTION
∙ High-pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the bulb. The bulb may break if
the glass envelope is scratched or the
bulb is dropped.
∙ Aiming should not be necessary after
replacing the H4 bulb. When aiming
adjustment is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. entering the headlight
body may affect bulb performance.
Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly just before a replacement
bulb is installed.
∙ Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector 䊊
from the rear end of the bulb.
A

B.
3. Pull off the rubber cap 䊊

C to
4. Push and turn the retaining pin 䊊
loosen it.

Replacing the fog light bulb
If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

CAUTION

5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not
shake or rotate the bulb when removing it.

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.

6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the
fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly
High/Low (Halogen)
Turn/Position
Side marker
Fog light (if so equipped)
Room light
Map light (if so equipped)
Trunk compartment light
High-mounted stop light*
Inside (if so equipped)
Spoiler (if so equipped)
Rear combination light*
Turn signal light
Stop/Tail
Backup (reversing)
License plate light*

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.

60/55
28/8
5
55
8
5
3.4

HB2
3457A
W5W
H11
—
W5W
158

16
—

W16W
—

21
21/5
21
5

PY21W
P21/5W
P21W
W5W

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

8-24 Do-it-yourself

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Map light (if so equipped)
Room light
Headlight assembly
Fog light (if so equipped)
High-mounted stop light (spoiler)
(if so equipped)
License plate light
Trunk light
High-mounted stop light (inside)
(if so equipped)
Rear combination light

LDI3124

Do-it-yourself 8-25

LDI2044

Map light (if so equipped)
Use a cloth to protect the housing.

SDI1805

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

8-26 Do-it-yourself

LDI2135

Trunk light

A and carefully
2. Remove the two clips 䊊
pull the carpet back.
B and the rear
3. Remove the two nuts 䊊
combination light from the vehicle.

JVC0014X

License plate light

LDI2807

Rear combination light
To change the stop/tail, turn signal or
backup (reversing) light bulbs, perform the
following:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)

The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).

WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.

For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in
the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

LDI2808

C
4. Disconnect the electrical connector 䊊
from the rear combination light.
D and the hous5. Remove four screws 䊊
ing from the rear combination light.

6. Replace the necessary bulbs.
Follow the instruction in reverse order to
install the rear combination light and carpet.

8-28 Do-it-yourself

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires
except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit and the
“CHECK TIRE PRES” warning (if so
equipped) is displayed in the odometer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:
∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly
and
cause
an
accident.
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

5
䊊
6
䊊

Tire and Loading Information
label
1
䊊

2
䊊

3
䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
Vehicle load limit: For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle
loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
8-30 Do-it-yourself

4
䊊

LDI2007

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is
set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
Spare tire size.

4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.
LDI0393

Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press
too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape. If the
hissing sound of air escaping from
the tire is heard while checking the
pressure, reposition the gauge to
eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.

6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.
Size
Front Original
Tire:
P185/65R15
Rear Original
Tire:
P185/65R15
Spare Tire:
T125/70D15

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
230 kPa, 33 PSI

230 kPa, 33 PSI
420 kPa, 60 PSI

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the
tire identification number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
Do-it-yourself 8-31

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
WDI0395

1
䊊

Example

Tire size (example: P215/65R15
95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles
(not all tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

3. Two-digit number (65): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter
in inches.

3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊

The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation
䊊
pressure

LDI2786

2
䊊

Example

TIN (Tire Identification Number)
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.

This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
䊊

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊

Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
Do-it-yourself 8-33

7 The word “radial”
䊊

The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊

Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the low tire
pressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front
and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
to malfunction resulting in personal
injury or death, excessive tire wear
and may damage the transmission
and differential gears.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires. Skid
and traction capabilities of studded snow
tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tires.

must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.

∙
WDI0258

∙

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”
in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
8-36 Do-it-yourself

∙
∙

WARNING
After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WDI0259

Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

∙ If your vehicle was originally
equipped with four tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing
two of the four tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires
on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.
∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad/shoe wear. For additional information on wheel-off set dimensions,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately one minute. The light will
remain on after one minute. Have
your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. Contact a NISSAN dealer for ID
registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.

Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident:

∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).
∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.

∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

Do-it-yourself 8-39

MEMO

8-40 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5
Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional maintenance items for
severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8
Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Maintenance under severe operating
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle
good mechanical condition, as well as its
emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are completely qualified to
work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department can perform the
service needed to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the

secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core
and cap when the tires are replaced due to
wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so
equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that
the vehicle is held securely with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
ensure they operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).

fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX
lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
The fluid should be at the bottom of the
filler opening. Vehicles operated in high
temperatures or under severe conditions
require frequent checks of the battery fluid
level.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

NOTE:

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.

Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch

Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level surface with
the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise
rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and exhaust system. At the end of
winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those
areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For additional information, refer
to the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that should
be regularly checked or replaced. The
maintenance schedule indicates at which
mileage/time intervals each item requires
service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance,
your vehicle requires that some items be
checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to
“General maintenance” in this section.
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.

NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of
non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises
against performing these services on a
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of
which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mixture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval
of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the type as originally
equipped.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:

Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for
signs of leakage at specified intervals.

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top
carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads,
replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect
the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than
210000, replace the CVT fluid.

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid
leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under “General maintenance” in
this section. When rotating tires, check for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.

∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

STANDARD MAINTENANCE
The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be required.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I*
R
I*
I*

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I*

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I*

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96
I*
I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
I*
R
I*
I*

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I*

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

See NOTE (6)

NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Maintenance-free item.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
*: Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not
perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items
and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines & cables
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝
Brake fluid夝
Manual transmission gear oil
CVT fluid
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Tire rotation
Drive shaft boots夝
Exhaust system夝

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12
I
I
I
I

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24
I
I
R
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I
I
I
I

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I
I
R
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I

I
I

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝
Brake fluid夝
Manual transmission gear oil
CVT fluid
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Tire rotation
Drive shaft boots夝
Exhaust system夝

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I
I
I
I

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96
I
I
R
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I
I
I
I

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I
I
R
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I

I
I

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or
24 months.
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at
NISSAN dealers every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change
(not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km).
(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under
severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts
Drive shaft boots
Exhaust system

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or
6 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or
12 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or
18 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or
24 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or
30 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or
36 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or
42 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or
48 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or
54 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or
60 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or
66 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or
72 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or
78 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or
84 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or
90 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or
96 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or
102 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or
108 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or
114 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or
126 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or
132 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or
138 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or
144 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Fuel

Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
1*: For additional
information, refer to “Engine
oil” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

Engine coolant
with reservoir

41 L

10-7/8 gal

9 gal

With oil filter
change

3.5 L

3-3/4 qt

3-1/8 qt

Without oil filter
change

3.2 L

3-3/8 qt

2-7/8 qt

6.7 L

1-3/4 gal

1-1/2 gal

7.2 L

1-7/8 gal

1-5/8 gal

With manual transmission
With continuously
variable transmission

Manual transmission gear oil (if so equipped)

10-2 Technical and consumer information

—

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in
this section.
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor
oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”
in this section.
• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE 10W-30 conventional petroleum based oil may be used and meet all specifications and requirements necessary to maintain the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi
75W-85, or equivalent.
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi is not
available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual
Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi as soon as it is available.

Fluid type

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid (if
so equipped)

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
Multi-purpose grease

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

For additional information, refer to the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
—
—
—

Air conditioning system refrigerant

—

Air conditioning system oil

—

3.5 L

7/8 gal

3/4 gal

Windshield-washer fluid

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids
other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in
mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.
• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R (KLHOO-PAGRO) or
equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle
emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are
labeled to indicate MMT content, so you
may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use
of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxygenate.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

LTI2051

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

10-6 Technical and consumer information

cation or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS

Oil viscosity

Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.

The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type R (KLH00PAGRO) or the exact equivalents.

The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”

Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during
automotive air conditioner system service. A
NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians
and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

HR16DE

in (mm)
cu in (cm3)

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder, inline
3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)
97.51 (1,598)
1–3–4–2

Idle speed
M/T in N (Neutral) position
CVT in N (Neutral) position
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle

No adjustment is necessary.

Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

PLZKAR6A-11
in (mm)

0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel type

Size

Offset in (mm)

Aluminum and steel

15 x 5.5J

1.57 (40)

Tire size

P185/65R15

Spare tire

T125/70D15

Body Type
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Track width
Front
Rear
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

Sedan
Unit: in (mm)
175.4 (4,455)
66.7 (1,695)
59.6 (1,514)
58.3 (1,480)
58.5 (1,485)
102.4 (2,600)
lbs. (kg) For additional information,
refer to the “F.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar
lbs. (kg) between the driver’s side
lbs. (kg) front and rear doors.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

TI1050M

LTI2274

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate is attached as shown. This number is
the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

10-10 Technical and consumer information

LTI2020

HR16DE engine

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.

STI0349

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as
shown. This label contains valuable vehicle
information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight
Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

WTI0198

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI0197

WTI0167

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown.

LTI2316

Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm
that the following parts are enclosed in the
plastic bag:
∙ License plate bracket

10-12 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
∙ License plate bracket screws x 2
∙ Screw grommets x 2
1 and
1. Hold the license plate bracket 䊊
make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid
damaging the area behind the fascia,
apply only light pressure to the drill.
2 into the holes
2. Insert the grommets 䊊
in the bumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver
into the grommet hole to turn the
threaded part of the grommet 90°.
4. Mount the license plate bracket using
3 .
the two longer screws 䊊

WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S. certification label.
∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

Example

4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
WTI0169
300 kg.)
Technical and consumer information 10-15

5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in this section.

LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
∙ Overloading and improper loading not only can shorten the life
of your vehicle and the tire, but
can also cause unsafe vehicle
handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and
personal injury. Failures caused
by overloading are not covered
by the vehicle’s warranty.

∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
10-16 Technical and consumer information

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These
ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.

TOWING A TRAILER
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
∙ Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the
ground. Doing so may cause serious
and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing).
Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.

Manual Transmission (if so
equipped)

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:

∙ Always tow with the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start
and idle the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every
500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause
damage to internal transmission parts.

Continuously Variable
Transmission (if so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow
the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.

2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003

Temperature A, B and C

For Canada

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

Emission Control System Warranty

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign.
However,
Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)
or
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fccp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be obtained
from Transport Canada’s Road Safety
Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371
or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English
speakers)
or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122.

You may contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
may also report safety defects online
at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fcTechnical and consumer information 10-19

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready
condition”
for
an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded.

10-20 Technical and consumer information

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact your
nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

MEMO

10-22 Technical and consumer information

11 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-18
Air bag warning light, supplemental . . .1-60,
2-18
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . .4-12
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Air conditioner specification label . .10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations . . . . . . .10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-8
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-16
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-13
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-24
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45

Compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-34, 4-39
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
iPod® player operation . . . . . . . . .4-43
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Steering wheel audio control
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . .2-32
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-31

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Bluetooth® hands-free phone
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49, 4-64
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-24
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-24
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-20, 8-17
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-17
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Brightness control
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-13
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28, 8-11
Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20, 8-21
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

C
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo
(See vehicle loading information). . . . .10-13
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46

CD player
(See audio system) . . . . . . .4-28, 4-34, 4-39
Child restraints . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-18, 1-20, 1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Top tether strap anchor point
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-20
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Clock set/adjustment . . .4-27, 4-31, 4-33, 4-36
Clock setting (models without Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27, 4-38
Clutch
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Compact disc (CD) player . . .4-28, 4-34, 4-39
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-11
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . .4-47
Heater and air conditioner controls. . .4-8
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

11-2

Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Curtain side-impact and rollover air
bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57

Defroster switch
Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-22
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-24
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3, 3-4
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-11
Driving with manual
transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-15
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine compartment check
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-9
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Emission control information label . . . .10-11
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-18
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-9
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5

Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 6-3
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . .10-11
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-51
Front-door pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-13
Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
G
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

iPod® Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 8-13

H
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49, 4-64
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-22
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Heater
Heater and air conditioner controls. . .4-8
Heater operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-24
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-24
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-33
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . .8-20, 8-21
Keyless entry
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry system) . .3-6, 3-7
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12
Emission control information label . .10-11
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-59
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-12
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-18

11-3

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-24
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-13
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-24
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-22
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-22
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-33
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15
Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3, 3-4
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-13
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . .3-12
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15
Luggage
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2

11-4

Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Manual windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-24
Mirror
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . .3-17, 3-18
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
One shot call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53, 4-67

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17, 3-18
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-10
Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-21
Owner's manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
P
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-17
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-22
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49, 4-64
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Power rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-23
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Precautions
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
Precautions on booster
seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-48
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Steering wheel audio control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-4
Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-22
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-7
Registering a vehicle in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . .3-6, 3-7
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-19

S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . . .1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-19
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-18
Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10, 7-7
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-13, 2-17
Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . .10-21
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-16
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-9
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 8-13
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Steering
Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-47
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-59
Supplemental air bag warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-18
Supplemental front impact air bag
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . .1-59

11-5

Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-42
Switch
Automatic power window switch . . .2-32
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-22
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-22
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-24
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-22
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 6-3
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-39
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . .10-17
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-28, 10-9

11-6

Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-3
Towing
2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-11
Driving with manual
transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-15
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
U
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .10-17
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-13
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . .10-9
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-26
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-26
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-13
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . .4-52, 4-67
W
Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-18
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-13
Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-14
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-14
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15
Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-13, 2-17
Supplemental air bag warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-18

Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-59
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28, 10-9
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-31
Manual windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Power rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Wiper
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-21

11-7

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is
recommended.
• If the above motor is not available, use an
equivalent motor oil that matches the
above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
label.
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in
schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle
damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : September 2017
Publication No.: OM18EM 0N17U1
Printed in U.S.A.

N17-D

2018.5

VERSA SEDAN
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger
vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT
REMINDERS!

SAFETY

INFORMATION

Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the
rear seat.
∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage
or
performance
problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.

to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
page in this Owner’s Manual.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the
time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to
change specifications, performance, design
or component suppliers without notice and
without obligation. From time to time,
NISSAN may update or revise this manual to
provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to
ensure you have access to accurate and upto-date information regarding your vehicle.
Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals
and any updates can also be found in the
Owner section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, refer

This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

– Your name, address, and telephone
number

For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase

For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

LIC3852

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Engine hood (P. 3-11)
Windshield (P. 8-16)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)
Power windows (if so equipped)
(P. 2-30)
Door locks (P. 3-4)
Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-6)
Keys (P. 3-2)
Mirrors (P. 3-18)
Tire pressure (P. 8-28)
Flat tire (P. 6-2)
Tire chains (P. 8-28)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-22)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-22)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2461

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Antenna (P. 4-43)
Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-22)
Trunk lid release (P. 3-12)
Rearview camera (P. 4-8)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-14)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-14)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-4)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2462

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Interior light (P. 2-32)
Sun visors (P. 3-17)
Map light (if so equipped) (P. 2-32)
Rearview mirror (P. 3-18)
Glove box (P. 2-27)
Parking brake (P. 5-18)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2463

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

LIC4000

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15.
16.
17.

Headlight/turn signal switch/fog
light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-22)
Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
Horn (P. 2-25)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-12)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)
Vents (P. 4-14)
Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-22)
Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-42)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Climate controls (P. 4-15)
Audio system (P. 4-23)
Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
Glove box (P. 2-27)
Power outlet (P. 2-26)
USB connection port and AUX IN
jack (P. 4-23)
Shift lever (P. 5-11)
Cup holders (P. 2-27)
Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

18.
19.
20.

21.
22.
23.

Cruise control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-19)
Tilt steering (P. 3-16)
Audio control switches (P. 4-43)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System switches (P. 4-47)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-26)
Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-14)
Hood release lever (P. 3-11)
Electronic outside rearview mirror
control switch (P. 3-18)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
HR16DE Engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LDI3231

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

2-13

Brake warning
light

2-13

Warning
light

Name

Page

Low fuel warning
light

2-15

Low tire pressure
warning light

2-15

Power steering
warning light

2-17

Seat belt warning
light and chime (if
so equipped)

2-17

Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-17

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator
light

2-18

Cruise indicator
light (if so
equipped)

2-18

Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-18

Front passenger
air bag status
light

2-18

Charge warning
light

2-14

Door open warning light

2-14

High beam indicator light (blue)

2-18

Engine oil pressure warning light

2-18

High temperature
warning light (red)
(if so equipped)

2-14

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Overdrive OFF
indicator light (if
so equipped)

2-19

Side light and
headlight indicator light (green) (if
so equipped)

2-20

Slip indicator light

2-20

Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights

2-20

Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-59
Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-60

SEATS

∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

ARS1152

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.

LRS2571

LRS2572

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the
seat in position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
with the parking brake fully applied.

LRS2573

LRS2833

Seat lifter (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)

FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so
equipped)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

1
䊊

A to fold each seatback
Pull the knob 䊊
down.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING

LRS2454

ARMREST (if so equipped for
driver’s side only)
To use the armrest, pull it down to the resting position.
A
䊊
B
䊊

Stowed position
Resting position

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

LRS2000

The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped
with
head
restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position
equipped with a head restraint.

䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2300

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.

LRS2299

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest

LRS2302

REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:

2. Single notch

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.

3. Lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

4. Stalks

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

LRS2303

WRS0134

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2351

For non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

LRS2305

LRS2306

Raise

Lower

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0134

WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.

SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

SSS0014

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PREGNANT WOMEN

LRS0786

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

LRS2571

LRS2674

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.

Fastening the seat belts

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2675

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
1 . The seat belt automation the buckle 䊊
cally retracts.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0242

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

CHILD SAFETY

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.

ways follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

CHILD RESTRAINTS
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
LRS2690

If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.

ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other
passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
WRS0756

LATCH system lower anchor locations

– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

WRS0700

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.

Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the rear par1 .
cel shelf 䊊

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0673

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:

WARNING
LRS0674

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

WRS0256

WRS0761

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2395

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

WRS0762

LRS2397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0799

Forward-facing

WRS0800

LRS0671

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.

WRS0697

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3061
1
䊊
2
䊊

Rear bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.

WRS0680

LRS0667

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

WRS0681

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0698

9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 2 through 8.

WRS0475

LRS2627
1
䊊
2
䊊

Rear bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2479

Low back booster seat

High back booster seat

LRS0453

LRS0464

Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat or in the front passenger
seat:

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699

booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.

LRS0454

WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front pasmay or
senger air bag status light
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

side-impact

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

ARS1133

ARS1041

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1042

ARS1043

ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

ARS1045

ARS1046

SSS0101

Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:

WARNING

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

SSS0162

SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WRS0032

LRS3007

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

front occupants. Because of this, the force
of the front air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, the front air bag module
during inflation.

The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.

WRS0475

Front passenger air bag and status light

Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
which is located on
bag status light
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:
light is OFF and the front pasThe
senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate
in a crash.
∙ Front passenger seat occupied by a
small adult, child or child restraint as
light
outlined in this section: The
illuminates to indicate that the front
passenger air bag is OFF and will not
inflate in a crash.

∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the
passenger meets the conditions as
light is
outlined in this section: The
OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational.
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.
For additional information related to the
normal operation and troubleshooting of
this occupant classification sensor system,
please refer to “Normal operation” and
“Troubleshooting” in this section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger
air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints may allow the
restraint to tip or move in a collision or
sudden stop. This can also result in the
passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system locks the classification
during driving so it is important that you
confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. Also, the
occupant classification sensor system
may recalculate the weight of the occupant when the vehicle comes to a stop
(i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so front
passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined
above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with no front passenger
and no objects on the front passenger
seat:
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.

NOTE:

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
3. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
child or child restraint occupying the
front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

LRS0259

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

∙ Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag
system. It is also recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS
wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used
on the side air bag or curtain air bag
systems.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
is used to indicate malfunctions
light
in the pretensioner(s) system. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental
air bag warning light” in this section. If the
operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

WRS0897

SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

LRS0100

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

MEMO

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

LIC4000

2-2 Instruments and controls

15.
16.
17.

Headlight/turn signal switch/fog
light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-22)
Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
Horn (P. 2-25)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-12)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)
Vents (P. 4-14)
Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-22)
Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-42)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Climate controls (P. 4-15)
Audio system (P. 4-23)
Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
Glove box (P. 2-27)
Power outlet (P. 2-26)
USB connection port and AUX IN
jack (P. 4-23)
Shift lever (P. 5-11)
Cup holders (P. 2-27)
Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

METERS AND GAUGES
18.
19.
20.

21.
22.
23.

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LIC3131

Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Trip computer

5.
6.
7.

Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator
Instrument brightness control
knob
Change/reset button
Instruments and controls 2-3

LIC2146

Type B (if so equipped)

1.
2.

2-4 Instruments and controls

Tachometer
Temperature gauge

Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Trip computer
Outside air temperature (if so
equipped)

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Fuel gauge
Speedometer
Change/reset button
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator
Instrument brightness control
CAUTION

LIC2118

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2136

Type B (if so equipped)

Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side or in the center of
the meter cluster. The odometer is located
within the trip computer.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Resetting the trip odometer
3 for more
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.
Average fuel economy and distance to
empty information is also available. For additional information, refer to “Trip computer” in this section.

LIC3305

Type A (if so equipped)

2-6 Instruments and controls

LIC2139

Type B (if so equipped)
Changing the display
Press the change/reset button
change the display as follows:

3
䊊

→ Trip
Odometer (ODO) → Trip
→ Instant fuel consumption → Average fuel
consumption → Distance to empty (cruising range) → Odometer (ODO)

LIC3306

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2025

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3307

Type A (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-7

LPD2128

2-8 Instruments and controls

LIC3598

Type A (if so equipped)

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
1 .
Do not rev the engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.

LIC2151

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
LIC2501

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2286

Type A (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-9

CAUTION
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
check engine light may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few
light should
driving trips, the
turn off. If the light remains on after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
LIC2287

LIC2470

Type A (if so equipped)

2-10 Instruments and controls

Trip B
Measures the distance of a second specific
trip.

Instant fuel consumption
The instant fuel consumption mode shows
the instant fuel economy. The display updates instantly when driving.

Average fuel consumption (mpg
or l (liter)/100 km)

∙ Distance to empty

∙ Outside air temperature (if so equipped)

Distance to empty

LIC2138

Type B (if so equipped)
∙ Instant fuel consumption
∙ Average fuel consumption

Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.

Trip A
Measures the distance of one specific trip.

The distance to empty mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can
be driven before refueling. The range is
constantly being calculated, based on the
amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the
actual fuel consumption.

The distance to empty includes a low
range warning feature: when the fuel level
is low, the distance to empty is automatically selected and the digits blink in order
to draw the driver’s attention. Press the trip
A if you
computer change/reset button 䊊
wish to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the
distance to empty will display (----).

Trip computer reset
Pressing the change/reset button for
more than 3 seconds will reset all modes
except Trip A and distance to empty.

Instruments and controls 2-11

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light

Power steering warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Brake warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime
(if so equipped)

Overdrive OFF indicator light
(if so equipped)

Charge warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Side light and headlight indicator light
(green) (if so equipped)

Door open warning light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light

Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Cruise indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

High temperature warning light (red)
(if so equipped)

Front fog light indicator light
(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

Front passenger air bag status light

Low fuel warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without

2-12 Instruments and controls

High beam indicator light (blue)

starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
or

The following lights (if so equipped) will
come on briefly and then go off:

(red) ,

,
,
,
,
If any light does not come on or operate in
a way other than described, it may indicate
a burned out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTS
This vehicle has various warning lights that
may illuminate to indicate a potential problem. For additional information, refer to the
specific light in this section.

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information,
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Brake warning
light

This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on when the
parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional infor-

Instruments and controls 2-13

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed
driving and abrupt braking. For additional
information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage
control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For
additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
∙ Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors
are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For
additional information, refer to “Engine oil”
in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

Low fuel warning
light

Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is also displayed in the odometer.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.

The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to "Check
tire pressure warning message" in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section
and in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not
appear if the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Power steering warning
light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the power steering is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have
the power steering checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
This vehicle has various indicator lights
that may illuminate to indicate a system
status. For additional information, refer to
the specific light in this section.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift
lever position. For additional information,
refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise indicator light (if so
equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control
switch is pushed. The light goes out when
the switch is pushed again. When the
cruise indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational. For additional information, refer to “Cruise control”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
the trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap is
loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
light does
few driving trips. If the
not turn off after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h).

– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system is operating, thus alerting the driver to
the fact that the road surface is slippery
and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after
the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
indicator light also comes on
The
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on

2-20 Instruments and controls

have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF position. This indicates the VDC system has
been turned off.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will operate
normally. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
The VDC indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after
about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on
indicator light while
along with the

you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.

Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is
opened while the key is left in the ignition
switch. Remove the key and take it with you
when leaving the vehicle.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off or to
AUTO before leaving the vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set
and the vehicle is driven. The chime will
stop if the parking brake is released or the
vehicle speed returns to zero.

LIC2789

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2131

Type B (if so equipped)
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

SWITCH OPERATION

3
䊊

The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

4 to have one sweep
Push the lever up 䊊
operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:

5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.

1
䊊

2
䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted (if so
equipped) by turning the knob toward
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster).
䊊
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

Instruments and controls 2-21

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

2-22 Instruments and controls

LIC2127

LIC2116

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.

Type A (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊

2
䊊

3
䊊

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams need not be engaged
for this function.

Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is in
or
position, the headlights
the
will turn off after a period of time.

CAUTION
WIC1509

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

LIC2128

Headlight beam select
1
䊊

2
䊊

Pull the lever back to return to the low
beams.

Instruments and controls 2-23

LIC2289

Type A (if so equipped)

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in
or
position.
the
A to adjust the
Type A: Press the control 䊊
brightness of instrument panel lights.
A to adjust the
Type B: Press the control 䊊
brightness of instrument panel lights.

2-24 Instruments and controls

LIC2137

Type B (if so equipped)
Also, Type B is equipped with daytime
brightness control. Brightness can be adjusted with the headlight control switch in
A .
the OFF position by pressing the control 䊊

WIC1512

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1
䊊

Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal
2
䊊

Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.

HORN
Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, and release the lever.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.

WIC1513

LIC4017

To sound the horn, push the center pad
area of the steering wheel.

Instruments and controls 2-25

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH

LIC3344

2-26 Instruments and controls

LIC3609

Instrument panel
The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. The outlets are rated at 12 volt,
120W (10A) maximum.

STORAGE

∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.
LIC3610

Console (if so equipped)

CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

LIC2157

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.

∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information
∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Instruments and controls 2-27

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
LIC1328

SEATBACK POCKET (if so
equipped)
The seatback pocket is located on the
back of the passenger’s seat. The pocket
can be used to store maps.

2-28 Instruments and controls

LIC3614

STORAGE TRAY
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.

LIC3611

LIC3613

Front

GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
A to store and
Use pocket on glove box lid 䊊
hide small objects.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

LIC3612

Rear

CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is
hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

Instruments and controls 2-29

LIC2158

Bottle holder

2-30 Instruments and controls

WIC1100

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Window lock button
Power door lock switch
Front passenger’s side window
switch
Right rear passenger’s window
switch
Left rear passenger’s window
switch
Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window
switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close the front
and rear passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and
hold it down. To close a window, pull the
switch and hold it up. To stop the opening
or closing function at any time, simply release the switch.

Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.

LIC0718

Instruments and controls 2-31

INTERIOR LIGHTS

LIC0410

2-32 Instruments and controls

LIC3352

SIC2063A

MANUAL WINDOWS (if so
equipped)

The interior light has a three-position
switch and operates regardless of ignition
switch position.

The side windows can be opened or closed
by turning the hand crank on each door.

1 ,
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of
door position. The lights will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.

2 ,
When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊
the interior lights will stay on for a period of
time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if
so equipped), a key or the power door
lock switch (if so equipped) while all
doors are closed and the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

LIC2126

Instruments and controls 2-33

TRUNK LIGHT
∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if
so equipped), a key or the power door
lock switch while all doors are closed
and the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the timer is activated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob
(if so equipped), a key, or the power door
lock switch.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
1 ,
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
the map light does not illuminate, regardless of door position.

The light will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

2-34 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-6
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-6
How to use remote keyless entry
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-18

Type B (if so equipped)

1.
2.

Integrated door lock key fob (two
sets)
Key number plate
CAUTION

SPA2342

Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.

Master key
Valet key
Key number plate

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.

A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,
it can be duplicated without knowing the
key number.
LPD2326

Type C (if so equipped)

1.
2.

Integrated door lock key fob (two
sets)
Key number plate
CAUTION

Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.

Manual
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
1 . To unlock, turn the key
of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
toward the rear of the vehicle 䊊

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2760

LPD0483

WPD0381

Inside lock

Selective open
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front 䊊 of the
vehicle locks all doors.
1

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)

To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen1 . When
ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊
locking the door this way, be certain not to
leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas2 .
senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Lockout protection

WARNING

When the power door lock switch (driver’s
or front passenger’s side) is moved to the
lock position with the key in the ignition
switch while any door is open, all doors will
lock and then unlock automatically. This
helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so
equipped)
∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph
(24 km/h).
∙ Continuously Variable
(CVT) (if so equipped)

Transmission

– All doors unlock automatically when
the transmission is placed in the P
(Park) position.
∙ Manual transmission (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when
the ignition is placed in the off position.

SPA2037

When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.
1

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ The remote keyless entry key fob
transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do
not operate the remote keyless entry
key fob while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored
for a flight.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn
the interior lights on (if so equipped), and
activate the panic alarm (if so equipped) by
using the key fob from outside the vehicle.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors.
The key fob can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
The effective distance depends on the
conditions around the vehicle.

As many as four key fobs can be used with
one vehicle. For information concerning
the purchase and use of additional key
fobs, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
The key fob may not function when:
∙ The battery is low or discharged.
∙ The distance between the vehicle and
the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).
The panic alarm (if so equipped) will not
activate when the key is in the ignition
switch.

∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If
the key fob gets wet, immediately
wipe until it is completely dry.
∙ Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that
key fob. This will prevent the key fob
from unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the
erasing procedure, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

LPD2028

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

∙ When the
button is pressed
with all doors locked, the hazard
warning lights flash twice and the
horn beeps once as a reminder that
the doors are already locked.

∙ If a door is open and you press
button, the doors will lock
the
but the horn will not beep and the
hazard lights will not flash.
The horn may or may not beep. For additional information, refer to “Silencing the
horn beep feature” in this section.
LPD2029

Unlocking doors
Press the

button on the key fob once.

∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks.
∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if
all doors are completely closed with the
ignition switch in any position except
the ON position.
∙ The interior light turns on and the light
timer activates for 30 seconds when
the interior light switch is in the DOOR
position with the ignition switch in any
position except the ON position.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Auto relock
When the
button on the key fob is
pressed, all doors will lock automatically
within 1 minute unless one of the following
operations is performed:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switch
and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
∙ Press the

button.

The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time.
∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Using the interior light (if so
equipped)
Press the
button on the key fob once
to turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior
lights” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
LPD2030

LPD2031

Using the panic alarm (if so
equipped)
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
button on the key fob for longer
the
than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

The hazard warning lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

LPD2032

Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be
deactivated using the key fob.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOOD

4. Remove the support rod and insert it
4 .
into the slot 䊊

LPD2802

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

TRUNK LID

LPD2036

KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close the trunk lid, lower and push
the trunk lid down securely.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2215

OPENER OPERATION
WARNING
∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism
provides a means of escape for children
and adults in the event they become
locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the
illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The
release handle is made of a material that
glows in the dark after a brief exposure to
ambient light.

The trunk lid release is located on the floor
to the left of the driver’s seat.

The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the trunk lock at the center of
the trunk lid.

To open the trunk lid, pull the opener lever
up.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the
trunk lid down securely.

LPD2042

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.

LPD2805

OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below
the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler
door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuelfiller door securely.

LPD2616

FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.

∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could
Malfunction Indialso cause the
cator Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
Recommendation” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be
displayed. Failure to tighten the fuelfiller cap properly after the LOOSE
FUEL CAP warning appears may cause
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) to illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illumilight illuminates benate. If the
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have your vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section in this manual.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.

LPD2617

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook
1 while refueling.
䊊
To install the fuel-filler cap:

NOTE:
Changing ignition switch status during
the refueling process may cause a delay
in fuel gauge response.

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

STEERING WHEEL

LPD2025

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2343

Type B (if so equipped)
3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset
A in the meter for about 1 secbutton 䊊
ond to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message after tightening the
fuel-filler cap.

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
previously described as soon as possible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2674

TILT OPERATION
1 down and adjust the
Push the lock lever 䊊
2 to the desteering wheel up or down 䊊
sired position.
1 up to lock the steering
Pull the lock lever 䊊
wheel in place.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.

SUN VISORS
3 in or
3. Slide the sun visor extension 䊊
out as needed.

CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcibly downward.

SPA1733

VANITY MIRROR
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

WPD0315

1. To block glare from the front, swing
1 .
down the sun visor 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the sun visor from the center mount
2 .
and swing the visor to the side 䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

WPD0126

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

REARVIEW MIRROR
1 reduces glare from
The night position 䊊
the headlights of vehicles behind you at
night.
2 when driving in
Use the day position 䊊
daylight hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0237

Instrument panel

Electric control type
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.
1 to select the right
Move the small switch 䊊
or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de2 .
sired position using the large switch 䊊
1 to the center
Move the small switch 䊊
(neutral) position to prevent accidentally
moving the mirror.

LPD2216

Manual folding outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,
audio and phone systems
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
How to use the touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to use the
(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the VOL (volume) knob /
PUSH
(power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Difference between predicted and
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-13
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
FM/AM radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
iPod®* player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Steering wheel switch for audio control. . . . . . 4-43
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Phone display screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58

Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS

WARNING
∙ Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving
in order that full attention may be
given to the driving operation.
∙ Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.
∙ Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
∙ In case you notice any foreign object
in the system hardware, spill liquid on
it, or notice smoke or smell coming
from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

LHA4680

MENU button

button*

3. Display screen
4.

(brightness control) button

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH
(power) button
* For additional information regarding the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
control button, refer to “Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.

If you use the system with the engine not
running for a long time, it will discharge
the battery, and the engine will not start.

The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or
muted.

Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These
keys can be selected by touching the
screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION

WARNING
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
∙ Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted, you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.

LHA4700

∙ The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If
the glass screen breaks, do not touch
it. Doing so could result in an injury.
∙ To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system
to malfunction.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

Touch-screen operation
Menu Item
Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters
123
OK

Result
Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “
” key to
return to the previous screen.
Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one
item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
Touch to manually enter numbers.
Completes the character input.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

LHA4706

HOW TO USE THE
BUTTON

LHA4700

To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
1. Press the

MENU button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

Menu item
Settings
Connections
Phone
Sound
Volume & Beeps
Clock
On-screen
Clock
Clock Format
Daylight Savings Time
Set Clock
Manually
System Voice
Camera
Others
Display
Language
OSS Licenses
Return All Settings To Default

Result
Touch to change the following settings.
Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional information, refer to “USB connections screen” and “Bluetooth® connections screen” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Volume & beeps” in this section.
Touch this key to adjust clock settings.
Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Touch to set the clock to 12 hours or 24 hours formats.
Touch to adjusts the daylight saving time to on or off.
Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes.
For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section.
Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.
Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, refer to “Adjusting the screen” in this
section.
Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

(brightness control) BUTTON

The following menu items are available on
the Launch Bar:

To change the display brightness, press
the
button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day or the
night display.
button for more
Press and hold the
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press
and hold the button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume)
KNOB / PUSH
(power)
BUTTON
Press the PUSH
(power) button to
turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL
(volume) knob to adjust audio volume.

∙ AM
∙ FM
∙ USB/iPod
∙ Bluetooth
∙ AUX
∙ Settings

LHA4707

SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH
BAR
Various system functions can be accessed
by touching the items on the Launch Bar
1 which is displayed on most of the main
䊊
menu screens (the Launch Bar does not
appear on some screens such as Settings
screens, camera screens, etc.)
Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to display the corresponding menu screens.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

REARVIEW MONITOR

LHA4752

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience
feature and is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and look
out the windows and check mirrors to
be sure that it is safe to move before
operating the vehicle. Always back up
slowly.
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.

LHA4753

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located next to
1 .
the trunk handle 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

4
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.

3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LHA4755

Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.

on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.

LHA4756

Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
the distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines are shown farther than
the actual distance. Note that any object

LHA4757

Backing up near a projecting
object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

A
object when backing up to the position 䊊
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA3522

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, touch
the “Settings” key.
2. Touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,
“Color”, or “Black Level” key.
LHA4758

Backing up behind a projecting
object
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the
the position 䊊

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”
key on the touch-screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show
every object.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

VENTS
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
1 , the RearView Monitor may not
camera 䊊
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

LHA4753

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA3126

Side vents
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by
opening, closing or rotating.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.

LHA2085

Center vents
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by
1 .
moving the slide as indicated 䊊

NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the
vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. This should
help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

Fresh air
Move the air intake lever to the
position. The air flow is drawn from outside the
vehicle.

Air recirculation
LHA5759

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Rear window defroster switch
Fan control dial
Air conditioner button
Temperature control dial
air recirculaAir intake lever (
fresh air)
tion and
Air flow control dial

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The
fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select
the air flow outlets.

— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Move the air intake lever to the
position to recirculate air inside the vehicle.
selection:
Use the
∙ when driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
air conditioner.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to
the desired position and press the
button to turn on the air conditioner. The
indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is operating. To turn off the air conbutton again.
ditioner, press the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
position.
the
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets.

This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
position.
the
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
fan control dial
windows, turn the
to the maximum position and the temperature control dial to the full hot position.
or
position is seWhen the
lected, press the
button to turn on
the air conditioner for better performance.
This will dehumidify the air and help defog
the windows.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Heating

1. Move the air intake lever to the
position for normal heating.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

1. Move the
position.

air intake lever to the

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
position.
the
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
LHA3765

NOTE:

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
position.
the

Side vents should direct air flow towards
the front side windows to improve defogging performance.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
or
position is seWhen the
button to turn on
lected, press the
the air conditioner for better performance.
This will dehumidify the air and help defog
the windows.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
position.
the
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
button. The indicator
4. Press the
light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.

∙ For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, move the air intake
position. Be sure to relever to the
turn to the
position for normal
cooling.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
position.
the
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
button. The indicator
4. Press the
light comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
This helps prevent damage to the
system due to lack of lubrication.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.

1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

LHA5760

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LHA5761

LHA5762

LHA5763

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

LHA5764

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
button
position and press the PUSH
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio
with the engine not running, the ignition
switch should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position (usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur
for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.

MP3 or WMA terms
∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
of the size of normal audio files. MP3
conversion of an audio track from CDROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible
loss
in
quality.
MP3
compression removes the redundant
and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
that the human ear doesn’t hear.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is
a compressed audio format created by
Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the
same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.
∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.
∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.

∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the
vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB
memory devices, USB hard drives and

iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
be supported by this system.
∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly.
∙ Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
not appear properly in the display. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
General notes for USB use:
∙ For additional information, refer to your
device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Notes for iPod® use:
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it
is connected during a seek operation. In
this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod®.
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
may momentarily black out, but will
soon recover.
∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large
video files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

iPod®* player
∙ Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not
displayed properly on the vehicle center
screen. We recommend using English
or Spanish language characters with an
iPod®.
∙ Large video podcast files cause slow
responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out,
but it will soon recover.

∙ If the iPod® automatically selects large
video podcast files while in the shuffle
mode, the vehicle center display may
momentarily black out, but it will soon
recover.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on the iPod®.
∙ The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may
remain in fast forward or rewind mode if
it is connected during a seek operation.
In this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.
∙ If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very
long names for the song title, album
name or artist name to prevent the
iPod® from resetting itself.

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Be careful not to do the following, or the
cable could be damaged and a loss of
function may occur:
∙ Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in
(40 mm) radius maximum).
∙ Twist the cable excessively (more
than 180 degrees).
∙ Pull or drop the cable.
∙ Do not force the iPod® cable connector into the device port.
∙ Close the center console lid on the
cable or connectors.
∙ Store objects with sharp edges in the
storage where the cable is stored.
∙ Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
∙ Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if
the cable and/or connectors are wet. It
may damage the iPod®.
∙ If the cable and connectors are exposed to water, allow the cable and/or
connectors to dry completely before
connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait
24 hours for it to dry).

∙ If the connector is exposed to fluids
other than water, evaporative residue
may cause a short between the connector pins. In this case, replace the
cable, otherwise damage to the iPod®
and a loss of function may occur.
∙ If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,
connectors cracked, contamination
such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not use the cable. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to replace the cable with a new
one.
∙ When not in use for extended periods of
time, store the cable in a clean, dust free
environment at room temperature and
without direct sun exposure.
∙ Do not use the cable for any other purposes other than its intended use in the
vehicle.
*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth® streaming audio
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio.
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your
audio device before using it with this
system.
∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.

∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
∙ While an audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.

∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section.

Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / PUSH
(power)
button
Place the ignition switch in the ON position
(power) button
and press the PUSH
while the system is off to call up the mode
(radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®)
that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
PUSH
Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust the
volume.

LHA4672

FM/AM RADIO
1.

MENU button

2. AUDIO button

MENU button

3. Display screen
4.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

5. VOL (volume) knob
(power) button

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

PUSH

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Press the
MENU button to show the
Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on
the display, then touch the “Sound” key.

Sound Settings
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sensitive Volume

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and
right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear
speakers.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system
as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting,
the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching “-” or “+” keys.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

Audio button

5. Preset list
To listen to a preset station, touch the
corresponding station from the preset
list. If displayed, touch the “<” or “>” keys
to scroll the preset list.

Push to display the audio screen. When this
button is pushed while the audio screen is
not displayed, the last audio source played
will play.

AM radio operation

LHA4708

AM/FM radio screen
1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key
Touch to display the radio menu
screen.
2. Direct Tune
Touch to manually enter a station.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
4. Reception information display
Reception information currently available such as frequency, station name,
etc. is displayed.

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Press the
MENU button and touch the
“AM” key or press the AUDIO button and
select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar
to bring up the AM display screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
“AM” key is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
AM Menu
Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM
Menu screen options:
∙ SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the
“AM Menu” key on the radio screen and
then touch the “SCAN” key. The stations
will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Touching the
“SCAN” key again during this period of
several seconds will stop tuning and the
radio will remain tuned to that station.

∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to scan
and update the station list displayed on
the right side of the AM Menu screen.
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
Press the
or
buttons to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Up to six stations can be registered in the
preset list.
1. Select the AM radio band.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be
displayed on the preset list.
To select and listen to the preset stations,
on the steering wheel briefly or
push
touch a preferred station on the preset list
on the radio screen.

FM radio operation
Press the
MENU button and touch the
“FM Menu” key or press the AUDIO button
and select FM on the bottom of the Launch
Bar to bring up the FM display screen.

If another audio source is playing when the
“FM” key is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown
on the screen during FM stereo reception.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
or
buttons to tune
Press the
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
1 to 12 Station memory operations
Up to 12 stations can be registered in the
preset list.

FM Menu

1. Select the FM radio band.

Touch the “FM” Menu key to display the FM
Menu screen options:

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

∙ SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch
the “FM Menu” key on the radio screen
and then touch the “SCAN” key. The stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting stations for several seconds.
Touching the “SCAN” key again during
this period of several seconds will stop
tuning and the radio will remain tuned
to that station.
∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to update the station list displayed on the
right side of the FM Menu screen.
∙ RDS Info: Radio station and song information can be displayed on the FM display screen.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be
displayed on the preset list.
To select and listen to the preset stations,
on the steering wheel briefly or
push
touch a preferred station on the preset list
on the radio screen.

Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation
Connecting auxiliary devices
Connect an AUX device into the AUX input
jack located on the center console below
the heater and air conditioner controls.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

Additional features

The AUX input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or
phone.

For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation” in this section regarding
the iPod® player available with this system.

Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in
the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono
plug is used, the audio output may not
function normally.

For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port” in
this section regarding the USB connection
port available with this system.

Activation and playing

For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio” in this section about the Bluetooth® audio interface
available with this system.

Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX
cable to the AUX device and the AUX input
jack. Select AUX mode from the audio
source menu screen or by pressing the
Source button on the steering wheel.

LHA4709

AUX screen
∙ Audio source indicator
Indicates that the AUX source is currently playing.
∙ “Volume Setting” keys
Touch one of the keys to select the
sound output gain from Low, Medium
and High.
∙ AUX from Launch Bar
Touch to change from another source
to AUX.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of
Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.

CAUTION
∙ To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.

LHA4458

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.
The port is illuminated for better visibility
when the headlight switch is in the ON position.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into
the connection port.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

5. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions.
Keys

LHA4711

USB connections screen
Press the
MENU button and touch the
“Connections” key or press the “Settings”
key and touch the “Connections” key to
change USB settings.
∙ Auto Change Source
Touch “ON” or “OFF” to change the audio
source settings for USB memory devices or an iPod® connected through a
USB cable.

LHA4710

USB screen
1. “USB Menu” key
Touch to switch to the USB Menu
screen.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
4. USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Description
Each time “
” key is
touched, the repeat mode
changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of the current track.
Touch again to select the
previous track. Touch and
hold to rewind the current
track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next
track. Touch and hold to
fast-forward the track.
Each time “
” key is
touched, the random mode
changes.

USB memory device player
operation
Activation and playing
Connecting the USB memory device into
the port will start playing the USB memory.
USB memory device can also be played by
touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen
or by touching USB on the Launch Bar.
To pause playing the USB memory device
” key. To resume playing,
touch the “
touch the “
” key.
Skipping tracks
To skip the tracks, push the
or
buttons on the control panel or touch the
” or “
” keys on the screen repeat“
edly until the preferred track is selected.
NOTE:
Depending on the condition, skipping to
the previous track may require pushing
the button or touching the key twice.
Pushing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To rewind or fast-forward the track, push
or
buttons on the
and hold the
control panel or touch and hold the “
”
or “
” keys on the screen.
Changing play mode
Repeat mode
Touch the “
” key on the USB screen to
change the repeat mode.
The following modes are available:
No text displayed: Repeat off
All: Repeat all
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder
1 Track: Repeat track

Random mode
” key on the screen to
Touch the “
change the random mode as follows:
No text displayed: Random off
Random: Random play
All: Repeat all
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

USB menu
Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB
screen to display the USB Menu screen.
“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB
screen.
“Folder List” key
Touch to display the folder
list. Touch an item on the list
to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be
displayed. Select a sub-folder
or track from the list.
“Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the
USB screen.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB connection port located on the
center console below the heater and air
conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®specific end of the cable to the iPod® and
the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

supports charging via a USB connection, its
battery will be charged while connected to
the vehicle with the ignition switch in the
ON position. The port is illuminated for better visibility when the headlight switch is in
the ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)*

∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be
fully functional.

LHA4724

iPod screen
1. “iPod Menu” key
Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
4. Album artwork
An image of the album artwork is displayed when available if the setting is
turned on.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

5. iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback functions

iPod® memory device player
operation

Changing play mode

6. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.

Activation and playing
Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB
cable will activate the iPod® mode.

Touch the “
” key on the iPod® screen
to change the repeat mode. The following
modes are available.
No text displayed: Repeat off

iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback functions.
Keys

The iPod® can also be played by touching
the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by
touching iPod on the Launch Bar.

Repeat mode

All: Repeat all
One: Repeat track

Skipping tracks

Random mode

or
To skip the tracks, push the
buttons on the control panel or touch the
” or “
” keys on the screen repeat“
edly until the preferred track is selected.

” key on the screen to
Touch the “
change the random mode as follows.
No text displayed: Random off

NOTE:
Depending on the condition, skipping to
the previous track may require pushing
the button or touching the key twice.
Pushing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To rewind or fast-forward the track, push
or
buttons on the
and hold the
control panel or touch and hold the “
”
or “
” keys on the screen,

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Songs: Random play

iPod® Menu

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod®
screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers. For additional information, refer
to “FM/AM radio” in this section.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB
screen.
“Folder List” key
Touch to display the folder
(if so equipped)
list. Touch an item on the list
to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be
displayed. Select a sub-folder
or track from the list.
“Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the alkey
bum artwork display on the
USB screen.
“Playlists” key
Touch to display the list according to the selected item.
“Artists” key
“Albums” key
“Songs” key
“Podcasts” key
“Genres” key
“Composers” key
“Audiobooks” key
“iTunes Radio”
key

NOTE:
For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual.
LHA4726

Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add
New” key to connect a phone.

Manual Connecting Procedure

4. When a compatible phone is found a
message with a PIN appears on the
screen.

1. Press the
control panel.

MENU button on the

2. Touch the “Connections” key on the
screen.
Menu Item
Bluetooth
ON
Favorite (Connection first)
PIN

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the
connection.

Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Automatic Connecting Procedure

4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® audio
playback functions

If no phone is connected to the system,
button on the
press and hold the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the
system will announce “transferring to the
add phone settings menu”. The system will
start the pairing procedure. When a compatible phone is found, a message with a
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the connection process. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® connections
screen” in this section.

5. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
Bluetooth® operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® playback
functions.
Keys
LHA4727

Bluetooth® screen
1. “BT Menu” key
Depending on the Bluetooth® version
supported by the connected device, either the “BT Menu” key or “Connections”
key is displayed.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.

Description
Each time “
” key is
touched, the repeat mode
changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch
again to select the previous
track. Touch and hold to rewind
the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track.
Touch and hold to fast-forward
the track.
Each time “
” key is
touched, the random mode
changes.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

Bluetooth® audio operation

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast
forward, rewind, randomize and repeat
music may be different between devices.
Some or all of these functions may not be
supported on each device.

To fast-forward or rewind the track, push
or
buttons on the
and hold the
” or “
”
control panel or touch the “
keys on the screen.

“Now Playing” key

Changing play mode
Repeat mode

“Connections” key

NOTE:
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device that is connected, it may not be possible to perform audio operations or a
delay may occur before music is played
back.
Activation and playing
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by
touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu
screen or by touching Bluetooth on the
Launch Bar.
To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,
” key. Touch the “
touch the “
to resume playing.

” key

The following items are available.

“Current List” key (if so
equipped)*

“Folder List” key*

Touch the “
” key on the screen to
change the repeat mode.
Random mode

Touch to display the
Bluetooth® audio screen.
A list of track in the currently selected folder is
displayed.
Touch to display the
connections screen.
Touch to display the
folder list. Touch an item
on the list to select the
folder.

Touch the “
” on the screen to change
the random mode.

*: displayed only when available.

NOTE:

Depending on the connected device, the
“BT Menu” key may not be displayed.

Available repeat/random modes change
depending on the connected device.

BT Menu
Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth®
audio screen to display the Bluetooth® audio menu screen.

Changing folders
To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

NOTE:

SOURCE switch

iPod®:

Push the SOURCE switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
AM → FM → USB/iPod®*→ Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM.

switch for less than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
track number.
USB:

* These modes are only available when
compatible media storage is inserted into
the device or connected to the system.

switch for less than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
track number.

Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch up or down
to increase or decrease the volume.
LHA2054

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
The audio system can be operated using
the controls on the steering wheel.
1. SOURCE switch
2. Tuning switch
3. Volume control switch

switch for more than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward
the current song.
Bluetooth® Audio:
switch for less than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the
next song.
switch for more than
∙ Push the
1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward
the current song.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)

CAUTION
∙ Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation or the antenna
rod may break during vehicle
operation.
∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free
mode to reduce user distraction. In this
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interaction by voice control. After connecting a
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
button on the steering
from the
wheel.
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
displaying pictures or opening apps,
may not be available while driving.
∙ For getting best results, always update
your device to the latest software version.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

REQUIREMENTS
Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please
check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,
etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*
when the music starts playing. Mode
selection is determined by the phone.

2. After reading the message, push or
button to reply
push and hold the
using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or a similar command to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to resume playback.
LHA4747

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push
onds.

button for less than 1.5 sec-

2. Speak your command and then listen
to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
button again within 5 seconds of the end of
the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend
the session.
Example 1 – Playing music
1. Push
onds.

button for less than 1.5 sec-

NOTE:
For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example 2 – Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming
text messages.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
Cannot access Siri Eyes
Free from switch on the
steering wheel
Audio Source does not
change automatically to
iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode
Play, pause, next track,
previous track or play
timer does not work
Cannot hear any music/
audio being played back
from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot receive text message notifications on the
vehicle audio system
Cannot reply to text
message notifications by
Siri Eyes Free

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade
performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push the
for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

button for 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM
CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.

∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatic ally to the system, consult the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on
device operation.
You can connect up to six different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
LHA4748

4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.

∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pressed before the initialization
completes, the system will announce
“There is no phone connected” and will not
react to voice commands.

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Keep all vents pointed away
from the microphone and close the
windows to eliminate surrounding
noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds,
etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.

∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
∙ For calling contacts by name, please
say both the first and last name of the
contact for better recognition.

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
button located on the
press the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.
After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Please say or select a command from the displayed list.”
Make sure the command is said exactly
as prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.

4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.
∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Exit” and ends the Voice Recognition session. You can also press
button on the steerand hold the
ing wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition session is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume
control switches on the steering wheel
while being provided with feedback. You
can also use the radio volume control
knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
button on the steering
pressing the
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.

Indicator

LHA4723

Description
Indicates there are unread received
messages.
Indicates the
Bluetooth® device that
is currently connected.
Indicates the strength
of the signal the
Bluetooth® device is
receiving.
Indicates the amount
of remaining
Bluetooth® device
battery.

LHA4747

INDICATORS

CONTROL BUTTONS

When a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connec1 for the phone and text
tion, indicators 䊊
messaging are displayed on the top of the
screen.

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

VOICE COMMAND BUTTON
Press and hold the
button for more than 1.5 seconds
to initiate the Voice Recognition session. To exit the Voice
Recognition session press
and hold the
for more
than 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to
“Voice prompt interrupt” in
this section.

PHONE BUTTON
To answer an incoming call or
to end a call press
button.
the
To reject a call press and hold
the
button.

You can use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at
once.
If an iPhone® is connected,
Siri® can be accessed by
pressing the
button for
less than two seconds. For
additional information, refer
to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this
section.

4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LHA4726

CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
Manual Connecting Procedure
1. Press the
control panel.

MENU button on the

2. Touch the “Connections” key on the
screen.
3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add
New” key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found a
message with a PIN appears on the
screen.
5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the
connection.
6. To access the Bluetooth® settings
” key on the Conmenu touch the “
nections screen. The following options
are available:

Menu Item

Result

Bluetooth

Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
ON

Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.

Favorite (Connection first)

Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.

Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

NOTE:

VOICE COMMANDS

∙ Call Other

Some cellular phones may require you to
accept certain permissions in order to
enable features on your Bluetooth® system. During the Bluetooth® pairing process, please check your cellular phone’s
display for a pop-up with the request to
grant phonebook access.
Granting phonebook access permission
will allow your contacts to be downloaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® system. A pop-up may display on your cellular phone stating that the contacts and
call history. Please select “Allow” or Yes”
to grant this permission.

Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
button for more
Press and hold the
than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone
command menu. The commands available are:

∙ Settings

Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system,
button on the
press and hold the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the
system will announce “transferring to the
add phone settings menu”. The system will
start the pairing procedure. When a compatible phone is found, a message with a
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the connection process. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® connections
screen” in this section.

“Call ”

∙ Recent Calls

Speak this command to make a call to a
contact that is stored in the phonebook.
Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name to
initiate a call. If the system does not recognize the name it will display a list of similar
names. After the prompt, speak or touch
an item number from the displayed list to
place the call.

∙ Read/Send Text (if so equipped)

“Dial ”

∙ Siri® (if so equipped)

Speak this command to make a call with a
spoken phone number. After the prompt,
say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone
number. The system will repeat the number back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or
“Correction” to re-enter the phone number.

∙ Call
∙ Dial

∙ Voice Assistant (if so equipped)
∙ Phonebook
∙ Quick Dial
∙ Redial
∙ Select Phone
∙ Add Phone
∙ Call Mobile
∙ Call Home
∙ Call Office
∙ Call Main

4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under “Recent Calls”:
∙ Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last
20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the
call is from an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the incoming call
will be displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the
item number on the screen to place the
call. Select the “Next” key to move
through the list of incoming calls.
∙ Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last 20
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the outgoing call
will be displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the
item number on the screen to place the
call. Select the “Next” key to move
through the list of outgoing calls.

∙ Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last 20
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the missed call will be
displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the
item number on the screen to place the
call. Select the “Next” key to move
through the list of missed calls.

“Read Text/Send Text” (if so
equipped)
Speak this command to access text messaging functions. For additional information, refer to “Text messaging” in this section.

“Phonebook through voice
command”
Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick
steps to access entries stored in the
phonebook. Commands are organized by
the phone number type selected in the cellular device. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.

The following commands are available:
∙
∙ Main
∙ Home
∙ Mobile
∙ Office
∙ Other
For additional information on manually selecting phonebook entries, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.

“Quick dial”
Speak this command to access the Quick
dial menu. After the prompt, speak or select an item number on the displayed list to
place the call. For additional information,
refer to “Making a call” in this section.

“Redial”
Speak this command to call the last number dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to
dial the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Redialing
”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it is
available, otherwise the number being redialed will be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

“Select Phone”
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information,
refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in
this section.

“Add Phone”

∙ Best Match List
When the system doesn’t recognize a
phonebook name it will provide a list of
similar sounding names. To turn this off,
touch the “ON” button, the indicator
light will turn off. To turn on, touch the
“ON” key again, the indicator light will
turn on.

Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information,
refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in
this section.

“Settings”
Speak this command to access the System Voice settings menu. The system will
exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of
the following options on the screen to
change the settings.
∙ Beep Only for Opening Prompt
By touching the “ON” key, the indicator
light will illuminate, the system voice will
turn off and only a tone will sound when
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System is activated. To turn the system
voice back on, touch the “ON” key again,
the indicator light will turn off.

4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LHA4705

PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN
The Phone screen can be displayed by
button on the control
pressing the
panel.
The following options are displayed:
∙ Quick Dial
Displays the Quick Dial screen. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in
this section.
∙ Phonebook
Displays the Phonebook screen. For additional information, refer to “Making a
call” in this section.

∙ Call History
Displays the Call History screen. For additional information, refer to “Making a
call” in this section.
∙ Dial Number
Displays the Dial Number screen. For
additional information, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.
∙ Text Message
Displays the received message screen.
For additional information, refer to “Text
messaging” in this section.
∙ Connections
Displays the Connections screen. For
additional
information,
refer
to
“Bluetooth® connections screen” in this
section.
∙ Volume
Displays the volume adjustment
screen. For additional information, refer
to “Volume & beeps” in this section.

MAKING A CALL
To make a call press the
button on
the control panel. Touch an option from
menu screen:
∙ Phonebook
Select a person and the phone number
you wish to call from the phonebook.
Depending on the device, the phonebook will be downloaded from the cellular phone automatically when it is
connected. If the automatic download
does not take place, the phone number
must be transferred to the hands-free
phone system from the cellular phone
prior to using this method. For additional information, refer to “Phone and
text message settings” in this section.
∙ Call History
Select a phonebook name or phone
number from the recent incoming, outgoing or missed calls tabs. Touch a
phonebook name or phone number
listed to initiate the call.
∙ Dial Number
Enter the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen.
Press the “OK” key on the screen to initiate the call.

For additional options to make a call, refer
to “Voice commands” in this section.

Quick Dial
Quick Dial entries can be used to quickly
make a call. The system allows up to 20
entries to be stored. To set up a quick dial
button on the control
press the
panel. Touch the “Quick Dial” key to display a
list of quick dial entries. Touch the “Edit” key
to edit current entries or touch the “Add
New” key to make a new entry. Two methods are given to create a quick dial entry:
∙ Touch the “Copy from Call History” key
to save a phone number from the Incoming, Outgoing or Missed call history
lists. Select the person or phone number from the menu to be added. A registration menu will display the Entry #,
phone number, phone number type
stored in the cellular phone and Voice
Tag. Select the “OK” key.
∙ Touch the “Copy from Phonebook” key to
save a number from the phonebook. Use
the scroll keys on the side to move up
and down through the menu. Select a
person to be added. A menu will display
the Entry #, phone number, phone number type stored in the cellular phone and
Voice Tag. Select the “OK” key.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

Voice tag
A voice tag can be recorded for each of the
registered Quick Dial numbers and can be
used to dial the number by speaking it. On
the Quick Dial registration screen, touch
the “Voice Tag” key. Select a relationship
from the list or create a new voice tag. To
record a new voice tag touch the “Customize” key on the screen then touch the “Store”
key. Speak a name after the prompt, the
new tag will be stored. To edit or create a
new voice tag select the “Customize” key
again. Touch the “Play” key to play the recorded voice tag, touch the “Restore” key to
edit the voice tag or “Delete” to delete the
current voice tag.

RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, the call information is
displayed on the control panel display.
button on the steering
Press the
wheel or touch the “
Answer” key on
the screen to accept the call. To reject the
Decline” key on the
call touch the “
screen.
If the user is not able to answer the call
right away, touch the “Hold Call” key displayed on the screen. A message will be

played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a
call right now.” The user may then accept
the call when available or reject the call.
To reject a call, press and hold the
button on the steering wheel.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active the following options
will appear on the control panel display:
∙ Mute
Touch this key to mute or unmute the
system.
∙ Dial Number
Touch this key to dial digits during the
phone call.
∙ Use Handset
Touch this key to transfer the call to the
handset. To transfer the call back from
the handset to the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, press the
button on the control panel then select
the “Transfer Hands-free” key on the
screen.
∙ Switch Call
This option will only be available when a
second call is active.
If supported by the phone, the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

allows for call waiting functionality. If a
call is received while another call is already active, a message will be displayed on the screen. Press the
button on the steering wheel or touch
the “
Answer” key on screen to accept the incoming call. Touch the
Decline” key on the screen to re“
ject the second call.
button
While a call is active, press the
on the steering wheel to access additional
options. Speak one of the following commands:
∙ “Send Digits”
Speak this command followed by the
digits to enter digits during the phone
call.
∙ “Switch call”
Speak this command to hold the second call and switch back to the original
call.

ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the
button
on the steering wheel or touch the
Hang up” key on the screen.
“

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before using
this feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.

NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if
the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and
instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text message integration
requires that the phone support MAP
(Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some
phones may not support all text messaging features. Please refer to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information, as well as your device’s Owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.
The availability of the text message function may vary depending on the cellular
phone.
When the cellular phone connected to the
vehicle receives a text message, a notification will appear on the control panel display. To check the message, touch the
“Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save
the message to be checked later.
Access text messaging through the vehicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or
through the vehicles control panel.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

Text messaging using Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System (if so
equipped)
Sending a text message (if so equipped)
1. Press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.

sages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”

2. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

∙ “Okay”

3. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:

∙ “Yes”
∙ “No”
∙ “Where are you?”

∙ Phonebook

∙ “When?”

∙ Quick Dial

To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the
system will prompt for the number of
the desired custom message. For additional information on setting and
managing custom text messages, refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this section.

∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
∙ Missed Calls
∙ Dial
4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are available as well as three custom mes-

4-60 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Reading a received text message
button on the
1. Press and hold the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.
2. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The display will show a list of 20 messages
with the sender and delivery time. Touch
the “Next” key on the screen to view all messages. To view a text message press
button on the steering wheel and
the
speak the number item list on the screen.
The following options will be available:
∙ Play
Speak this command to have the system say the message.
∙ Reply
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Call
Speak this command to call the sender.
∙ Previous
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom messages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.

Received message screen

Sending a text message (if so equipped)

Touching the “Read” key on the incoming
message notification screen or selecting a
message from the message list will show
the details of the received message on the
display.

This function may not be supported depending on the cellular phone.

NOTE:

Available actions:

Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).

∙ Prev.
Touch this key to read the previous
message.

NOTE:

∙ Next
Touch this key to read the next message.

For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.

Text messaging using the control
panel
Display received message list
1. Press the
panel.

button on the control

2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the
screen
3. Touch an item on the list to read or
reply to the message.
Up to 100 messages can be stored in the
message list.

1. Press the
panel.

button on the control

2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the
screen.
3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the
screen.

∙ Play/Stop
Touch the “Play” key to have the handsfree phone system read out the received message. Touch the “Stop” key to
stop reading.
∙ Call
If the sender of the message is registered in the phonebook, touch the “Call”
key to make a call to the sender.
∙ Reply
A reply message can be selected from
the predefined list or by a custom message.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

The following items are available:
Available item
To

Select Text

Send

Enter Number by Keypad
Quick Dial
Phonebook
Call History
Fixed
Customized

Action
Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm.
Select a recipient from the quick dial list.
Select a recipient from the phonebook.
Select a recipient/phone number from call history.
Touch to display a list of predefined text messages.
Touch to display a list of custom text messages. Custom text can be created or edited from the setting
menu. For additional information, refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this section.
Touch to send the message.

4-62 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Access the Connections screen to change
settings and view Bluetooth® information.
To access the Connections screen press
MENU button on the control
the
panel. Touch the “Connections” key on the
screen then select the Bluetooth tab.
The paired phone will be added to the list
on the Bluetooth® connections screen.
Touching the name of another device on
the list will switch the connected device.

“
LHA4716

BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS
SCREEN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

” (back) key
“
Bluetooth tab
Connections screen
“Add New” key
“
” (settings) key
” (info) key
“
” (Bluetooth® Audio connec“
tion) key
” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free
“
Phone System connection) key

” (back) key

Touch the “
” key to go back to the
previous screen.

Connecting Bluetooth®
For additional information on connecting a
cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.
NOTE:
Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the
noise.

Bluetooth tab
This tab will display up to 6 Bluetooth® devices. If 6 devices are already connected,
one of the devices must be deleted before
another device can be connected.

“Add New” key
Touch the this key on the screen to connect a new Bluetooth® device. For additional information, refer to “Connecting
procedure” in this section.,

“

” (Bluetooth® settings) key

Touch the “
” key on the screen to display a list of options.
∙ Bluetooth
Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth®
connection on or off
∙ Favorite (Connection first)
Touch this key to change which device
will be connected first when multiple
devices are connected to the vehicle.
” key on or off to make the
Turn the “
device a favorite connection.
” key on or off to make the
Turn the “
device a favorite connection.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

∙ Pin
Touch this key to customize the PIN
code. Input a four digit number then
touch the “OK” key. The new PIN will be
set.

“

” (info) key

Touch the “
” key on the screen to display the information of the cellular phone
or to delete the device.
Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired
device then select “Yes” when a message
appears.

“

” (Bluetooth® Audio
connection) key

A list of connected devices will be displayed
on the screen. Touch the “
” key next to
the name to connect a device to
Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a
favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Select the key again to disconnect the device.
The device will not be removed from the
list. For additional information on removing
a device, refer to “Info key” in this section.

” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System connection)
key

A list of connected devices will be displayed
” key next to
on the screen. Touch the “
the name to connect a device to the
Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is
listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the
icon. Select the key again to disconnect the
device. The device will not be removed
from the list. For additional information on
removing a device, refer to “Info key” in this
section.

4-64 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LHA4721

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE
SETTINGS
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System settings can be changed according to the user’s preference. To access the “Phone” setMENU button
tings menu press the
on the control panel. Touch the “Settings”
key then select the “Phone” key.

The following options are available:
Menu Item
Quick Dial
Phonebook

Text Message

Notifications
Automatic Hold

Edit

Result
Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in this section.

Delete All

Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial.

Download Entire Phonebook

All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle
are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phones Owner’s manual.

Auto Downloaded

Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected.

Text Message

Turns the text messaging function on/off.

Text Message Ringtone

Turn the incoming message sound on/off.

Signature

Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.

Auto Reply

Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off.

Auto Reply Text Message

Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages or create a custom message.

Edit Custom Text

Create or edits a customized text message reply. To set a custom message, touch the “Add New” key. Select a
message from the recent text log. Touch the “OK” key to set the message or the “Select” key to choose a different message. Up to three custom messages can be set. To delete a message select the custom message and
touch the “Delete” key.

Driver Only

When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset.

Vehicle Ringtone

Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.
When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

Volume & beeps
There are several methods to customize
the volume settings.
Volume & Beeps
The Volume & Beeps screen can be found
MENU button on the
by pressing the
control panel, touching the “Settings” key
on the screen and selecting “Volume &
Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the following options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on the
screen.
The available settings are:
∙ Ringtone
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone
of incoming calls.

Volume Settings
The Volume settings screen can be found
button on the control
by pressing the
panel then touching the “Volume” key on
the screen. To adjust the volume of the
following options, touch the “–” and “+” keys
on the screen.
The available settings are:
∙ Ringtone
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone
of incoming calls.
∙ Outgoing Call
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing
calls.

∙ Outgoing Call
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing
calls.
∙ Voice Prompt Vol.
Adjust the volume level of the system
voice.
∙ Text-to-speech Vol.
Adjust the volume of the replay voice for
text messaging.
∙ Button Beeps
Turns on/off the button beep sounds
and alarm for prohibited operations.

4-66 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (if
so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Ignition switch positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-16
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-31

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.

5-2 Starting and driving

Starting and driving 5-3

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for possible influences
before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon
as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning
light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:

CAUTION
∙ The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with tire
chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.

∙ Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.
This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and
the TPMS will not function properly.

Starting and driving 5-5

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

5-6 Starting and driving

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires
are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving
lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

Starting and driving 5-7

IGNITION SWITCH
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the
likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident,
alcohol can increase the severity of the
injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the
influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of
people are injured or killed in alcohol-related
collisions. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated,
the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.

5-8 Starting and driving

SSD0392

When the ignition switch cannot be placed
in the LOCK position:

To lock the steering wheel, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering
wheel, insert the key and turn it gently
while rotating the steering wheel slightly
right and left.

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Move the ignition switch slightly in the
ON direction.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (1)

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the
ignition switch.
If the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position, the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position.
The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.
1 between the
There is an OFF position 䊊
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel.
WSD0052

ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is
not running.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system
and the electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as
the engine has started, release the key. It
automatically returns to the ON position.

Starting and driving 5-9

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so
equipped), and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least
whenever you refuel.
∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
∙ Lock all doors.
∙ Position seat and
restraints/headrests.

adjust

head

5-10 Starting and driving

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
models:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is
turned to the OFF position or if the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
Manual transmission (M/T) models:
For best practice when operating an
M/T, depressing the clutch before
moving the shift lever is ideal.
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
while cranking the engine.
The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.

Starting and driving 5-11

5-12 Starting and driving

CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever into a driving
gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually
start the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before
moving the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
The Continuously Variable Transmission
is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST
be depressed before shifting from P
(Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the
key is removed.

LSD2013

To move the shift lever:

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any drive position,
the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition
switch. If this occurs, perform the following
steps:

A while depressing
Press the button 䊊
the brake pedal

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped.

A to shift
Press the button 䊊

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) to park
the vehicle and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK position to remove
the key.

A
Shift without pressing the button 䊊

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever from P
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

P (Park)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. R (Reverse) speed is limited to
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h) in the R (Reverse) position. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the
shift lever button pressed in to move the
shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or
any drive position to R (Reverse).

Starting and driving 5-13

N (Neutral)

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover.

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.

∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also
be used.
4. Push down the shift lock release using
a suitable tool.

D (Drive)

A and
5. Press the shift lever button 䊊
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift
lock release.

Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
L (Low)
Use this position for engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep
slopes and whenever approaching sharp
bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in
any other circumstances.

LSD2011

5-14 Starting and driving

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position to unlock the steering wheel.
7. Release the parking brake.
The vehicle may be moved to the desired
location.
Replace the removed shift lock release
cover after the operation.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the
P (Park) position, have the Continuously
Variable Transmission system checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Each time the engine is started, or when
the shift lever is shifted to any position
other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF
mode will be automatically turned off.

Fail-safe
LSD2012

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the
Continuously Variable Transmission will
not be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and

Starting and driving 5-15

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.

∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.

SSD0535

5-16 Starting and driving

On the manual transmission, you cannot
shift directly from 5th gear into R (Reverse).
First shift into N (Neutral), then into R (Reverse).
The shift lever ring returns to its original
position when the shift lever is moved to
the N (Neutral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1st gear, shift into N (Neutral),
then release the clutch pedal. Depress the
clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1st gear.

Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle
speeds for shifting into a higher gear.
These suggestions relate to fuel economy
and vehicle performance. Actual upshift
speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
GEAR CHANGE
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th

mph (km/h)
9 (14)
12 (19)
21 (34)
28 (45)
—

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas
and high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft
[1219 m]):
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th

mph (km/h)
15 (24)
25 (40)
40 (64)
45 (72)
—

Suggested maximum speed in
each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is
not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested
speed (shown below) in any gear. For level
road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe
posted speed limits, and drive according to
the road conditions, which will ensure safe
operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle
control.
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th

mph (km/h)
28 (46)
52 (83)
76 (122)
103 (166)
—

Starting and driving 5-17

PARKING BRAKE
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
B and
lever slightly, press the button 䊊
lower the lever completely.

WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

WSD0169

5-18 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

∙ To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.

Starting and driving 5-19

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument panel
goes out.

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
switch.

5-20 Starting and driving

To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.

2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances

∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.

∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.

Starting and driving 5-21

5-22 Starting and driving

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly
while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill
grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.
Continuously Variable Transmission
models:
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.

Starting and driving 5-23

POWER STEERING
1 :
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
2 :
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

5-24 Starting and driving

BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the brake shoes

Starting and driving 5-25

– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.

5-26 Starting and driving

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.

When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes
so note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
indicator light comes on in the
the
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when this indicator light
is on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
indicator illumiVDC system. The
nates to indicate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to

Starting and driving 5-27

prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
indicator flashes if this ocwheel. The
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
indicator will not flash.
the
The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

5-28 Starting and driving

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator light may flash or
the
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
indicator
light
may
the
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are exinditremely deteriorated, the
cator light may illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator light
properly and the
may flash or illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator light may
ramp, the
flash or illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator light
properly and the
may flash or illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the front and rear wheels
depending on the radius of the turn.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator light may flash or
the
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
indicator
light
may
the
illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are exinditremely deteriorated, the
cator light may illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator light
properly and the
may flash or illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator light may
ramp, the
flash or illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator light
properly and the
may flash or illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

Starting and driving 5-29

5-30 Starting and driving

the

∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be
seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
∙ Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
use the proper extension cord or a
grounded outlet can result in a fire or
electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault
Interrupt
(GFI)
protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2 to 4 hours,
depending on outside temperatures,
to properly warm the engine coolant.
Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-31

MEMO

5-32 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck
vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

FLAT TIRE
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.

LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors
tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light is
lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)
warning message is displayed in the trip
computer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS
will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section, and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-3

3 , collapse the jack
To remove the jack 䊊
from the storage location. If necessary, remove the spare tire first to easily access
the jack.

LCE2142

Blocks

Flat tire

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

LCE2418

Getting the spare tire and tools
1 .
Open the trunk. Lift the floorboard 䊊

Remove the bag containing the jacking rod
2
and wheel nut wrench. 䊊

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover
or wheel surface.

SCE0913

To remove the spare tire, loosen the bolt by
turning counterclockwise. Once free, remove the bolt. Remove the spare tire.

SCE0630

Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
result in personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jacking
1 as illustrated.
rod 䊊
2 between the wheel and
Apply cloth 䊊
jacking rod to prevent damaging the wheel
and wheel cover.

In case of emergency 6-5

6-6 In case of emergency

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

LCE2059

WCE0048

Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ) until
sequence illustrated (䊊
they are tight.

In case of emergency 6-7

WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.

6-8 In case of emergency

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mi (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information Label.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.
NOTE:
You may need to remove the wheel cap
(if so equipped) to secure the damaged
tire using the spare tire clamp.

WCE0157

6. Install the jack in its storage area and
tighten the jack screw clockwise.
7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk
floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.

JUMP STARTING

WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information,
refer to specific instructions under
the heading “Wheels and tires” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.

WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-9

CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
LCE2223

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause personal injury.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Transmission). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights,
heater, air conditioner, etc.).

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and
tight.

Do not allow the 2 vehicles to touch.

4. Connect jumper cables in the seA ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ).
quence illustrated (䊊

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start
the engine of the vehicle being jump
started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, place the ignition switch
in the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before trying again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.

6-10 In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) and manual transmission models cannot be push-started or towstarted. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
∙ For manual transmission models,
never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to
collide with the tow vehicle.
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started
or tow-started. Attempting to do so
may cause transmission damage.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating, indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading (if so equipped) or a red high tem(if so
perature warning light
equipped), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the
following steps.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high
speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine). Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

In case of emergency 6-11

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing
equipment could damage your vehicle.
Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are
generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure
proper towing and to prevent accidental
damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your
vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.

6-12 In case of emergency

CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing” in the “Technical and Consumer Information” section of this manual.

∙ When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:

LCE2345

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).

In case of emergency 6-13

LCE2346

6-14 In case of emergency

gine after every 500 miles of towing may
cause damage to the transmission’s internal parts.

When towing long distances or speeds in
excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission. For additional
information, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

WARNING

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (manual transmission
models).

∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) System.

∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continuously
Variable Transmission models) or 1st
(Low) and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models).

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . .

7-5
7-5
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

WAXING

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.

Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

The high-mounted stop light must be
properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

CAUTION

WAI0007

Push toward rear of vehicle.

Lift to remove.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.

7-4 Appearance and care

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precautions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.

LAI2010

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.

Appearance and care 7-5

7-6 Appearance and care

with the parking break applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.

CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

LAI2034

Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.

Appearance and care 7-7

Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.

7-8 Appearance and care

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Variable voltage control system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Key fob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

8-2 Do-it-yourself

∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure
even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even
if the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before working near the fan.

CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.

∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness
connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
HR16DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

LDI3231

Do-it-yourself 8-3

8-4 Do-it-yourself

For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this
section.

Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE OIL
It is normal to add some engine oil between oil maintenance intervals depending on the severity of operating conditions
or depending on the property of the engine oil used. More engine oil is consumed
by frequent acceleration/deceleration especially when the engine rpm is high. Consumption is likely to be higher when the
engine is new. If the rate of oil consumption, after driving for 3,000 miles
(5,000 km), is more than 0.5 liter per
600 miles (1,000 km), consult a NISSAN
dealer
LDI3091

8-6 Do-it-yourself

LDI2795

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
B.
plug 䊊

B with a
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
wrench by turning it counterclockwise
and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.

WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
LDI2788

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to burn yourself. The
engine oil may be hot.
∙ Waste oil
properly.

must

disposed

∙ Check your local regulations.
B
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug 䊊
and a new washer. Securely tighten the
B with a wrench. Do not use
drain plug 䊊
excessive force.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
B and oil filter.
around the drain plug 䊊
Correct as required.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
B.
filter 䊊
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Then remove the oil filter by turning it
by hand.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
13 ft-lb (18 N·m)

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

LDI2790

BRAKE FLUID

CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

LDI2791

8-10 Do-it-yourself

BATTERY

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING
∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

LDI3216

Battery (Type A) (if so equipped)

8-12 Do-it-yourself

WDI0528

Battery (Type B) (if so equipped)
1. Remove the vent cap(s) with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect
the battery case.

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.

LDI2250

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
WDI0529

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill. Reinstall the vent cap(s).

∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

DRIVE BELT
A is located near the
The current sensor 䊊
battery along the negative battery cable. If
you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable
body ground such as the frame or engine
block area.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is
in poor condition, have it replaced or
adjusted. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition.

LDI2399

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Water pump pulley
Generator pulley
Manual tensioner pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

SPARK PLUGS

AIR CLEANER

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.

LDI2708

Do-it-yourself 8-15

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
A , then release
release the retaining clips 䊊
the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the
B.
unit upward 䊊
The viscous paper type filter element (if so
equipped) should not be cleaned and reused. The dry paper type filter element (if so
equipped) may be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance log shown in the “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
of the air cleaner housing and the cover
with a damp cloth.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner filter,
make sure the air cleaner cover is seated
A .
in the housing and latch the clips 䊊

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after
cleaning the blades and using the wiper,
install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.

LDI2725

3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.

Self-adjusting brakes

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. The rear
drum-type brakes self-adjust every time
the parking brake is applied.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brakes pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators
LDI2710

Do-it-yourself 8-17

FUSES
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.
LDI2385

LDI3023

8-18 Do-it-yourself

For checking and replacing the fusible links,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

LDI2712

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
B.
䊊

Do-it-yourself 8-19

LDI2713

C , replace it with an
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
D.
equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

LDI2747

5. Pull the storage switch straight out
C .
from the fuse box 䊊

8-20 Do-it-yourself

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of
B and twist it to separate
the corner 䊊
the upper part from the lower part. Use
a cloth to protect the casing.

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
C .
bottom of the case 䊊
Recommended battery: CR1620 or equivalent.
4. Close the lid and install the screw securely.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

SDI2134A

KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:
A .
1. Remove the screw 䊊

Do-it-yourself 8-21

LIGHTS
∙ The key fob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
∙ The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.

the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
A
2. Disconnect the electrical connector 䊊
from the rear end of the bulb.
B.
3. Pull off the rubber cap 䊊

C to
4. Push and turn the retaining pin 䊊
loosen it.

5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not
shake or rotate the bulb when removing it.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.

∙ Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb
If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the
fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.

8-24 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly*
High/Low
Turn/Position
Side marker
Fog light (if so equipped)*
Room light
Map light
Trunk light
High-mounted stop light*
Inside (if so equipped)
Spoiler (if so equipped)
Rear combination light*
Turn
Stop/Tail
Backup (reversing)
License plate light*

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.

60/55
28/8
5
55
8
5
3.4

HB2
3457A
W5W
H11
—
W5W
158

16
—

W16W
—

21
21/5
21
5

PY21W
P21/5W
P21W
W5W

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Map light
Room light
Headlight assembly
Fog light (if so equipped)
High-mounted stop light (spoiler)
(if so equipped)
License plate light
Trunk light
High-mounted stop light (inside)2
(if so equipped)
Rear combination light

LDI3124

Do-it-yourself 8-25

LDI2044

Map light
Use a cloth to protect the housing.

SDI1805

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

8-26 Do-it-yourself

LDI2135

Trunk light

A and carefully
2. Remove the two clips 䊊
pull the carpet back.
B and the rear
3. Remove the two nuts 䊊
combination light from the vehicle.

JVC0014X

License plate light

LDI2807

Rear combination light
To change the stop/tail, turn signal or
backup (reversing) light bulbs, perform the
following:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)

LDI2808

C
4. Disconnect the electrical connector 䊊
from the rear combination light.
D and the hous5. Remove four screws 䊊
ing from the rear combination light.

6. Replace the necessary bulbs.
Follow the instruction in reverse order to
install the rear combination light and carpet.

WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires
except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit and the
“CHECK TIRE PRES” warning is displayed in the odometer, one or more
of your tires is significantly underinflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above

8-28 Do-it-yourself

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in
the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

5
䊊
6
䊊

Tire and Loading Information
label
1
䊊

2
䊊

3
䊊

Tire size: Refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
8-30 Do-it-yourself

4
䊊

LDI2007

Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
Spare tire size.

3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.

LDI0393

Checking tire pressure

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.

1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.

7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.

2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.

Size
Front and Rear
Original Tires:
P185/65R15
Spare Tire:
T125/70D15

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
230 kPa, 33 PSI
420 kPa, 60 PSI

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the
Tire Identification Number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
Do-it-yourself 8-31

1
䊊

Example

8-32 Do-it-yourself

3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊

The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation
䊊
pressure

LDI2786

Example

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
䊊
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.

This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

5 Maximum load rating
䊊

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).

This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always
use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.

6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊

Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
Do-it-yourself 8-33

7 The word “radial”
䊊

The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊

Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology

8-34 Do-it-yourself

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

∙
WDI0258

∙

∙
∙

WDI0259

Replacing wheels and tires

ing capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire
chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height. Some of these effects may
lead to accidents and could result in
serious personal injury.
∙ If your vehicle was originally
equipped with four tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing
two of the four tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires
on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.

∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference
with
the
brake
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set
dimensions, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carry-

Do-it-yourself 8-37

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for ID registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.

WARNING
∙ The spare tire should be used for
emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the
first opportunity to avoid possible tire
or differential damage.
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).

∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

MEMO

8-40 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).

fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX
lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

NOTE:

Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level surface with
the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mixture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval
of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the type as originally
equipped.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:

Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for
signs of leakage at specified intervals.

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/
144 months, continue maintenance at
the same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:

∙ Using a car-top carrier.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.

NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

Drive belts

See NOTE (1)

Air cleaner filter

See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I*

EVAP vapor lines

Fuel lines

Fuel filter
Engine coolant*

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
See NOTE (6)

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I*

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96
I*
I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
I*
R
I*
I*

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I*

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

See NOTE (6)

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72

Brake lines & cables

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝

Brake fluid夝

Manual transmission gear oil

See NOTE (1)

CVT fluid

See NOTE (2)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Tire rotation
Drive shaft boots夝
Exhaust system夝

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

See NOTE (3)
I

I
I

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144

Brake lines and cables

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝

Brake fluid夝

Manual transmission gear oil

See NOTE (1)

CVT fluid

See NOTE (2)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Tire rotation
Drive shaft boots夝
Exhaust system夝

See NOTE (3)
I

I
I

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.

Maintenance operation

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance interval

Brake fluid

Replace

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings

Inspect

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts

Inspect

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Drive shaft boots

Inspect

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system

Inspect

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
When traveling or registering in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Fuel

Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
1*: For additional
information, refer to “Engine
oil” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual.

Engine coolant
with reservoir

41 L

10-7/8 gal

9 gal

With oil filter
change

3.5 L

3-3/4 qt

3-1/8 qt

Without oil filter
change

3.2 L

3-3/8 qt

2-7/8 qt

6.7 L

1-3/4 gal

1-1/2 gal

7.2 L

1-7/8 gal

1-5/8 gal

With manual transmission
With continuously
variable transmission

Manual transmission gear oil (if so equipped)

10-2 Technical and consumer information

—

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Fluid type

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid (if
so equipped)

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
Multi-purpose grease

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

For additional information, refer to the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
—
—
—

Air conditioning system refrigerant

—

Air conditioning system oil

—

3.5 L

7/8 gal

3/4 gal

Windshield-washer fluid

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.

orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.

Oil viscosity

LTI2051

Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type R (KLH00PAGRO) or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during
automotive air conditioner system service.
A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

HR16DE

in (mm)
cu in (cm3)

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder, inline
3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)
97.51 (1,598)
1–3–4–2

Idle speed
M/T in N (Neutral) position
CVT in N (Neutral) position
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle

No adjustment is necessary.

Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation

PLZKAR6A-11
in (mm)

0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel type

Size

Offset in (mm)

Aluminum and steel

15 x 5.5J

1.57 (40)

Tire size

P185/65R15

Spare tire

T125/70D15

10-10 Technical and consumer information

Body Type
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Track width
Front
Rear
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

TI1050M

LTI2274

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate is attached as shown. This number is
the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

LTI2020

HR16DE engine

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.

STI0349

10-12 Technical and consumer information

WTI0198

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI0197

WTI0167

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown.

LTI2316

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm
that the following parts are enclosed in the
plastic bag:
∙ License plate bracket
∙ License plate bracket screws x 2
∙ Screw grommets x 2
1 and
1. Hold the license plate bracket 䊊
make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid
damaging the area behind the fascia,
apply only light pressure to the drill.

2 into the holes
2. Insert the grommets 䊊
in the bumper fascia.

TERMS

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver
into the grommet hole to turn the
threaded part of the grommet 90°.

It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:

4. Mount the license plate bracket using
3 .
the two longer screws 䊊

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Technical and consumer information 10-15

LTI2335

Example

10-16 Technical and consumer information

LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.
∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

TOWING A TRAILER
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

Manual Transmission (if so
equipped)
∙ Always tow with the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start
and idle the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every
500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause
damage to internal transmission parts.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty

WARNING

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.

Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003

Temperature A, B and C

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

Technical and consumer information 10-19

To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or You may contact Transport Canada’s
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Defect Investigations and Recalls DiviSeventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
20590. You can also obtain other in- may also report safety defects online
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Safformation about motor vehicle safety at:
Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fcfrom http://www.safercar.gov.
10-20 Technical and consumer information

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)
or
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fccp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada’s
Road Safety Information Centre at
1-800-333-0371
or
online
at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English
speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/
securiteroutiere (French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 10-21

10-22 Technical and consumer information

11 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17
Air bag warning light,
supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . .4-18
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . .4-23
Air conditioner specification label . .10-13
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Heater and air conditioner controls. .4-15
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-23
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-13
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-25
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-30
AM radio operation. . . . . . . . . . . .4-30

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Auxliliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-31
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
FM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
iPod® player operation . . . . . . . . .4-36
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Steering wheel audio control
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
USB Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . .2-32
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29, 8-11
Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21, 8-21
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-10
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Block heater
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . .4-47
Bluetooth® connections . . . . . . . .4-63
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . .4-52

Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-25
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-24
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-20, 8-17
Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-18
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-7
Brightness control
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-12
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo
(See vehicle loading information) . . . .10-14
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 1-23

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Top tether strap anchor point
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-20
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Clutch
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-11
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-7
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . .4-43
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-15
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Curtain side-impact and rollover air
bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57

11-2

Defroster switch
Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-22
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-24
Display controls
(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-11
Driving with manual
transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-16
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine compartment check
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-9
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Emission control information label . . . .10-12
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-19
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-10
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-51
Front-door pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-14
Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
G
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13

H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-47
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-22
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Heater
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-15
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Important vehicle information label . . .10-12
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-24
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-24
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-33
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
iPod® Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . .8-21, 8-21
Keyless entry
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-7
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13
Emission control information label . .10-12
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-59
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Launch bar menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-13
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-24
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-12
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

11-3

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-24
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-22
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-22
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-33
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15
Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51
Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-14
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . .3-12
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15
Luggage
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-14
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . .
Inside the vehicle . . . . . .
Maintenance precautions.
Outside the vehicle . . . . .
Seat belt maintenance . .

11-4

.
.
.
.
.

.9-2
.9-3
.8-2
.9-2
.1-17

Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Manual windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Menu button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-24
Mirror
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-11
Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-22
Owner's manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
P
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-18
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-23
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-47
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-24
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Precautions
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
Precautions on booster
seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Programmable features. . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-47
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Steering wheel audio control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-10
Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-22
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-8
Registering a vehicle in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . .3-6, 3-7
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-20
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . . .1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-20
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-19
Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10, 7-7
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-13, 2-17
Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-22
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-16
Side air bag system
(See supplemental side air bag, curtain
and rollover air bag systems) . . . . . . . .1-57
Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-10
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Steering
Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-24
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-43
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-59
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17
Supplemental front impact air bag
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . .1-59
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-42
Switch
Automatic power window switch . . .2-32
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-22
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-22
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-24

11-5

Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-22
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 6-3
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-38
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-18
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-28, 10-10
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-3
Towing
2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

11-6

Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-11
Driving with manual
transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-16
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-18
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-13
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-10
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-27
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-27
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-14
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14

Ventilators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Voice Prompt Interrupt. . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
W
Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-13
Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-14
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-14
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15
Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-13, 2-17
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-59
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Weights
(See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-10
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28, 10-10

Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-31
Manual windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Wiper
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-21

11-7

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

2018.5 NISSAN VERSA SEDAN

N17-D

Printing : March 2018
Publication No.: OM18EM 5N17U0
Printed in the U.S.A.

‘18

N17-D

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Create Date                     : 2017:08:21 13:53:43-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2018:04:24 11:06:26-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2018:04:24 11:06:26-05:00
Creator Tool                    : PDFL 7.0
Document ID                     : uuid:A6CD6E0B8986E711A2E8B9E36DD84473
Instance ID                     : uuid:ec5a158c-969f-487b-9867-b2bfbd559ebb
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:26f602a6-0e5a-465d-9366-60093b91470e
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:4eec31d0-763f-4c29-88b9-52a8faee18de
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2018 Nissan Versa Sedan | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information | Nissan USA
Description                     : Download the 2018 Nissan Versa Sedan Owner's Manual at the official Nissan USA website.
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : nissan, versa, versa sedan, 2018, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, service, maintenance, scheduled maintenance
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.16 (Windows)
Keywords                        : nissan; versa; versa sedan; 2018; owner manual; owner guide; owner’s manual; pdf; vehicle manual; service; maintenance; scheduled maintenance
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 702
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Warning                         : [Minor] Ignored duplicate Info dictionary

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2018 Nissan Versa Sedan | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation